]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
really sync config/ChangeLog
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8
NC
4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set I960
0285c67d 28@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 29@set M68K
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
252b5132
RH
42@ifinfo
43@format
44START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
46END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47@end format
48@end ifinfo
49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
9fbcbd81 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9fbcbd81
NC
95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
961999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
97Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 98
0285c67d 99Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 100under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
101or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 104section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 105@c man end
252b5132 106
252b5132
RH
107@end titlepage
108@end iftex
4ecceb71 109@contents
252b5132
RH
110@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
84ec0e6d 112@ifnottex
252b5132 113@node Top
71ba23f6 114@top LD
e49e529d
JM
115This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118@end ifset
119version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 120
cf055d54 121This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
122Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 124
252b5132
RH
125@menu
126* Overview:: Overview
127* Invocation:: Invocation
128* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129@ifset GENERIC
130* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131@end ifset
132@ifclear GENERIC
133@ifset H8300
134* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
136@ifset Renesas
137* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
138@end ifset
139@ifset I960
140* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
141@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
142@ifset ARM
143* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
144@end ifset
145@ifset HPPA
146* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
148@ifset M68HC11
149* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
150@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
151@ifset M68K
152* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
153@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
154@ifset POWERPC
155* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156@end ifset
157@ifset POWERPC64
158* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
160@ifset SPU
161* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
162@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
163@ifset TICOFF
164* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
165@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
166@ifset WIN32
167* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
168@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
169@ifset XTENSA
170* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
171@end ifset
252b5132
RH
172@end ifclear
173@ifclear SingleFormat
174* BFD:: BFD
175@end ifclear
176@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
177
178* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
179* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 180* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 181* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 182@end menu
84ec0e6d 183@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
184
185@node Overview
186@chapter Overview
187
188@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
189@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 190
0879a67a 191@ifset man
0285c67d 192@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 193ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
194@c man end
195
196@c man begin SEEALSO
197ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
198the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
199@file{ld}.
200@c man end
201@end ifset
202
203@c man begin DESCRIPTION
204
ff5dcc92 205@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 206their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 207compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 208
ff5dcc92 209@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
210a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
211to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
212
0285c67d
NC
213@ifset man
214@c For the man only
ece2d90e 215This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
216@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
217language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
218@end ifset
219
252b5132 220@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
221This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
222to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
223write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
224@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
225available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
226@end ifclear
227
228Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
229linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
230execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 231@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
232(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
233
0285c67d
NC
234@c man end
235
252b5132
RH
236@node Invocation
237@chapter Invocation
238
0285c67d
NC
239@c man begin DESCRIPTION
240
ff5dcc92 241The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
242and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
243you have many choices to control its behavior.
244
0285c67d
NC
245@c man end
246
252b5132
RH
247@ifset UsesEnvVars
248@menu
249* Options:: Command Line Options
250* Environment:: Environment Variables
251@end menu
252
253@node Options
254@section Command Line Options
255@end ifset
256
257@cindex command line
258@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
259
260@c man begin OPTIONS
261
252b5132
RH
262The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
263practice few of them are used in any particular context.
264@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 265For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
266object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
267link a file @code{hello.o}:
268
269@smallexample
270ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
271@end smallexample
272
ff5dcc92 273This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
274result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
275the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
276directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
277
ff5dcc92 278Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
279point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
280as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
281which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
282files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
283different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
284occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
285option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
286noted in the descriptions below.
287
288@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
289Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
290together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
291options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
292an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
293
294Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
295specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
296and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
297are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
298message @samp{No input files}.
299
36f63dca 300If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
301assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
302augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
303linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
304permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
305or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
306@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
307script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
308extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
309to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
310the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
311
312For options whose names are a single letter,
313option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
314whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
315option that requires them.
316
317For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 318precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 319@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 320this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 321only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
322@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
323name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
324output.
325
326Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
327option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
328immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
329@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
330Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
331accepted.
252b5132 332
36f63dca
NC
333Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
334(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
335prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
336compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
337
338@smallexample
2509a395 339 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
340@end smallexample
341
342This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
343silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
344may also arise when passing options that require values through a
345driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
346a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
347and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
348the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
349
350@smallexample
351 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
352@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
353
354Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
355linker:
356
ff5dcc92 357@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 358@include at-file.texi
dff70155 359
2509a395
SL
360@kindex -a @var{keyword}
361@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
362This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
363argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
364@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
365@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
366to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
367
7ee314fa
AM
368@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
371@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
372specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
373will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
374finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
375it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
376This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
377interface.
378
252b5132
RH
379@ifset I960
380@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
381@kindex -A @var{arch}
382@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
383@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
384@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
385In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
386Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
387@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
388the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 389archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
390family}, for details.
391
ff5dcc92 392Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
393other architecture families.
394@end ifset
395
396@ifclear SingleFormat
397@cindex binary input format
398@kindex -b @var{format}
399@kindex --format=@var{format}
400@cindex input format
401@cindex input format
402@item -b @var{input-format}
403@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
404@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
405file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 406@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 407that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 408configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 409to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
410default input format the most usual format on each machine.
411@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
412supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
413formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
414@xref{BFD}.
415
416You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
417binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
418linking object files of different formats), by including
419@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 420particular format.
252b5132
RH
421
422The default format is taken from the environment variable
423@code{GNUTARGET}.
424@ifset UsesEnvVars
425@xref{Environment}.
426@end ifset
427You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
428@code{TARGET};
429@ifclear man
430see @ref{Format Commands}.
431@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
432@end ifclear
433
434@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@cindex compatibility, MRI
437@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
438@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 439For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 440files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
441@ifclear man
442@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
443@end ifclear
444@ifset man
445the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
446@end ifset
447Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 448the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
449scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
450If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
451specified by any @samp{-L} options.
452
453@cindex common allocation
454@kindex -d
455@kindex -dc
456@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 457@item -d
252b5132
RH
458@itemx -dc
459@itemx -dp
460These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
461compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
462even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
463script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
464@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
465
7ee314fa
AM
466@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
467@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
468@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
469@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
470Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
471@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
472specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
473will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
474option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
475The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
476
252b5132
RH
477@cindex entry point, from command line
478@kindex -e @var{entry}
479@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 480@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
481@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
482Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
483program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
484named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
485and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
486base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
487@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
488and other ways of specifying the entry point.
489
b58f81ae
DJ
490@kindex --exclude-libs
491@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
492Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 493exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
494@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
495automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
496port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
497explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
498option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
499be treated as hidden.
500
e1c37eb5
DK
501@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
502@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
503Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
504should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
505into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
506may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
507used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
508the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
509match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
510command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
511of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
512regardless of this option.
513
252b5132
RH
514@cindex dynamic symbol table
515@kindex -E
516@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 517@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
518@item -E
519@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
520@itemx --no-export-dynamic
521When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
522option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
523all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
524set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
525
526If you do not use either of these options (or use the
527@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
528dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
529referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
530
531If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
532back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
533dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
534linking the program itself.
535
55255dae 536You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 537be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 538See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 539
8b747e1a
DK
540Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
541support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
542the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
543
36f63dca 544@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
545@cindex big-endian objects
546@cindex endianness
547@kindex -EB
548@item -EB
549Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
550
551@cindex little-endian objects
552@kindex -EL
553@item -EL
554Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 555@end ifclear
252b5132 556
2509a395
SL
557@kindex -f @var{name}
558@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
559@item -f @var{name}
560@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
561When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
562to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
563table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
564symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
565
566If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
567run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
568the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
569first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
570@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
571in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
572Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
573implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
574machine specific performance.
575
576This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
577will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
578
2509a395
SL
579@kindex -F @var{name}
580@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 581@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 582@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
583When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
584the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
585of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
586on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
587
588If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
589run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
590dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
591filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
592found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
593used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
594@var{name}.
595
ff5dcc92 596Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 597toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
598object files.
599@ifclear SingleFormat
600The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 601@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 602@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
603environment variable.
604@end ifclear
605The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
606creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 607
3dbf70a2 608@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
609@kindex -fini=@var{name}
610@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
611When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
612executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
613address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
614the function to call.
615
252b5132
RH
616@kindex -g
617@item -g
618Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
619
2509a395
SL
620@kindex -G @var{value}
621@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 622@cindex object size
2509a395 623@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
624@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
625Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
626@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
627MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
628sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
629
630@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 631@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 632@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 633@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
634@itemx -soname=@var{name}
635When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
636the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
637which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
638linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
639field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
640
641@kindex -i
642@cindex incremental link
643@item -i
644Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
645
3dbf70a2 646@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
647@kindex -init=@var{name}
648@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
649When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
650executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
651of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
652function to call.
653
252b5132 654@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 655@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 656@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 657@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
658@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
659Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
660list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
661If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 662will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 663will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 664
ff5dcc92 665On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
666files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
667and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
668called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
669@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
670indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
671to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
672@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
673
674The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
675specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
676was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
677command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
678archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
679the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
680
ff5dcc92 681See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
682archives multiple times.
683
684You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
685
686@ifset GENERIC
687This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 688if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
689behaviour of the AIX linker.
690@end ifset
691
692@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 693@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 694@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 695@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 696@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
697Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
698for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
699option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
700in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
701on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 702@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
703order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
704how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
705option is specified.
252b5132 706
9c8ebd6a
DJ
707If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
708by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
709
252b5132
RH
710@ifset UsesEnvVars
711The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 712@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
713some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
714@end ifset
715
716The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
717@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
718at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
719
720@cindex emulation
721@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 722@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
723Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
724emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
725
726If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
727@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
728
729Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
730configured.
731
732@cindex link map
733@kindex -M
734@kindex --print-map
735@item -M
736@itemx --print-map
737Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
738information about the link, including the following:
739
740@itemize @bullet
741@item
3b83e13a 742Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
743@item
744How common symbols are allocated.
745@item
746All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
747which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
748@item
749The values assigned to symbols.
750
751Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
752involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
753have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
754linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
755of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
756the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
757linker script containing:
758
759@smallexample
760 foo = 1
761 foo = foo * 4
762 foo = foo + 8
763@end smallexample
764
765will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
766option is used:
767
768@smallexample
769 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
772@end smallexample
773
774See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
775scripts.
252b5132
RH
776@end itemize
777
778@kindex -n
779@cindex read-only text
780@cindex NMAGIC
781@kindex --nmagic
782@item -n
783@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
784Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
785libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
786mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
787
788@kindex -N
789@kindex --omagic
790@cindex read/write from cmd line
791@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 792@item -N
252b5132
RH
793@itemx --omagic
794Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
795not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
796libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
797mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
798is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
799specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
800
801@kindex --no-omagic
802@cindex OMAGIC
803@item --no-omagic
804This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
805sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
806be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
807shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
808
809@kindex -o @var{output}
810@kindex --output=@var{output}
811@cindex naming the output file
812@item -o @var{output}
813@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 814Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
815option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
816script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
817
818@kindex -O @var{level}
819@cindex generating optimized output
820@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 821If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 822the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
823should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
824option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
825the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
826no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
827of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 828
a712da20
NC
829@kindex -q
830@kindex --emit-relocs
831@cindex retain relocations in final executable
832@item -q
833@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 834Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
835Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
836order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
837in larger executables.
838
dbab7a7b
NC
839This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
840
4f471f39
RS
841@kindex --force-dynamic
842@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
843@item --force-dynamic
844Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
845to VxWorks targets.
846
252b5132
RH
847@cindex partial link
848@cindex relocatable output
849@kindex -r
1049f94e 850@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 851@item -r
1049f94e 852@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 853Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 854turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
855linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
856magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
857@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 858@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
859If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
860linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
861constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
862
62bf86b4
HPN
863When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
864partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
865relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
866example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
867with input files in other formats at all.
868
252b5132
RH
869This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
870
871@kindex -R @var{file}
872@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
873@cindex symbol-only input
874@item -R @var{filename}
875@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
876Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
877relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
878to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
879programs. You may use this option more than once.
880
ff5dcc92 881For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 882followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 883the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
884
885@kindex -s
886@kindex --strip-all
887@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 888@item -s
252b5132
RH
889@itemx --strip-all
890Omit all symbol information from the output file.
891
892@kindex -S
893@kindex --strip-debug
894@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 895@item -S
252b5132
RH
896@itemx --strip-debug
897Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
898
899@kindex -t
900@kindex --trace
901@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 902@item -t
252b5132 903@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 904Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
905
906@kindex -T @var{script}
907@kindex --script=@var{script}
908@cindex script files
909@item -T @var{scriptfile}
910@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
911Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 912@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 913@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
914output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
915the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
916specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
917options accumulate.
252b5132 918
14be8564
L
919@kindex -dT @var{script}
920@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
921@cindex script files
922@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
923@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
924Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
925
926This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
927processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
928command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
929@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
930behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
931command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
932the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
933@samp{gcc}).
934
252b5132
RH
935@kindex -u @var{symbol}
936@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
937@cindex undefined symbol
938@item -u @var{symbol}
939@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
940Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
941symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
942modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
943different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
944option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
945
946@kindex -Ur
947@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 948@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
949For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
950@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 951turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
952@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
953It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
954with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
955be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
956@samp{-r} for the others.
957
577a0623
AM
958@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
960Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
961@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
962missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
963specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
964multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
965input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
966in a linker script.
a854a4a7 967
252b5132
RH
968@kindex -v
969@kindex -V
970@kindex --version
971@cindex version
972@item -v
973@itemx --version
974@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 975Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
976lists the supported emulations.
977
978@kindex -x
979@kindex --discard-all
980@cindex deleting local symbols
981@item -x
982@itemx --discard-all
983Delete all local symbols.
984
985@kindex -X
986@kindex --discard-locals
987@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 988@item -X
252b5132 989@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
990Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
991system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
992or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
993
994@kindex -y @var{symbol}
995@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
996@cindex symbol tracing
997@item -y @var{symbol}
998@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
999Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1000option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1001to prepend an underscore.
1002
1003This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1004don't know where the reference is coming from.
1005
1006@kindex -Y @var{path}
1007@item -Y @var{path}
1008Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1009for Solaris compatibility.
1010
1011@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1012@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1013The recognized keywords are:
1014@table @samp
1015
1016@item combreloc
1017Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1018lookup caching possible.
1019
1020@item defs
560e09e9 1021Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1022shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1023
6aa29e7b
JJ
1024@item execstack
1025Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1026
cd6d6c15
NC
1027@item initfirst
1028This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1029It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1030before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1031the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1032the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1033objects.
1034
1035@item interpose
1036Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1037but the primary executable.
1038
5fa222e4
AM
1039@item lazy
1040When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1041dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1042the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1043Lazy binding is the default.
1044
cd6d6c15
NC
1045@item loadfltr
1046Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1047runtime.
1048
1049@item muldefs
1050Allows multiple definitions.
1051
1052@item nocombreloc
1053Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1054
1055@item nocopyreloc
1056Disables production of copy relocs.
1057
1058@item nodefaultlib
1059Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1060ignore any default library search paths.
1061
1062@item nodelete
1063Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1064
1065@item nodlopen
1066Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1067
1068@item nodump
1069Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1070
6aa29e7b
JJ
1071@item noexecstack
1072Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1073
1074@item norelro
1075Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1076
cd6d6c15
NC
1077@item now
1078When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1079dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1080when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1081deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1082first called.
1083
1084@item origin
1085Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1086
6aa29e7b
JJ
1087@item relro
1088Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1089
24718e3b
L
1090@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1091Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1092
1093@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1094Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1095
cd6d6c15
NC
1096@end table
1097
ece2d90e 1098Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1099
1100@kindex -(
1101@cindex groups of archives
1102@item -( @var{archives} -)
1103@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1104The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1105either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1106
1107The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1108references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1109the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1110archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1111object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1112would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1113they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1114resolved.
1115
1116Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1117it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1118more archives.
1119
69da35b5
NC
1120@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1121@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1122@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1123@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1124Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1125recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1126and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1127the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1128behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1129so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1130restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1131
4a43e768
AM
1132@kindex --as-needed
1133@kindex --no-as-needed
1134@item --as-needed
1135@itemx --no-as-needed
1136This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1137on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1138the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1139on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31
NC
1140needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1141emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1142from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1143DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1144undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1145@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1146
e56f61be
L
1147@kindex --add-needed
1148@kindex --no-add-needed
1149@item --add-needed
1150@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1151These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1152their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1153options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1154and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1155
252b5132
RH
1156@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1157@item -assert @var{keyword}
1158This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1159
1160@kindex -Bdynamic
1161@kindex -dy
1162@kindex -call_shared
1163@item -Bdynamic
1164@itemx -dy
1165@itemx -call_shared
1166Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1167for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1168default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1169for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1170multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1171@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1172
a1ab1d2a
UD
1173@kindex -Bgroup
1174@item -Bgroup
1175Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1176section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1177object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1178@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1179only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1180
252b5132
RH
1181@kindex -Bstatic
1182@kindex -dn
1183@kindex -non_shared
1184@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1185@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1186@itemx -dn
1187@itemx -non_shared
1188@itemx -static
1189Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1190platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1191variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1192may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1193library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1194option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1195option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1196shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1197references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1198libraries.
252b5132
RH
1199
1200@kindex -Bsymbolic
1201@item -Bsymbolic
1202When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1203definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1204for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1205within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1206platforms which support shared libraries.
1207
40b36307
L
1208@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1209@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1210When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1211symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1212This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1213libraries.
1214
55255dae
L
1215@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1216@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1217Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1218typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1219global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1220within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1221to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1222in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1223which support shared libraries.
1224
1225The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1226scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1227
40b36307
L
1228@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1229@item --dynamic-list-data
1230Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1231
1232@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1233@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1234Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1235is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1236
0b8a70d9
L
1237@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1238@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1239Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1240
252b5132
RH
1241@kindex --check-sections
1242@kindex --no-check-sections
1243@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1244@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1245Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1246been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1247perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1248suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1249allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1250restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1251Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1252force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1253option.
252b5132 1254
ddbb8a31
NC
1255@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1256@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1257@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1258@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1259This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1260by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1261command line. Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1262output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1263input dynamic library. With @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}
1264specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1265follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries ignored. The default
1266behaviour can be restored with @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1267
1268This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1269libraries. With the default setting dynamic libraries mentioned on
1270the command line will be recursively searched, following their
1271DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1272required by the output binary. With
1273@option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries} specified however the searching
1274of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the dynamic
1275library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1276symbols.
1277
252b5132
RH
1278@cindex cross reference table
1279@kindex --cref
1280@item --cref
1281Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1282generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1283Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1284
1285The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1286easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1287sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1288symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1289definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1290
4818e05f
AM
1291@cindex common allocation
1292@kindex --no-define-common
1293@item --no-define-common
1294This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1295The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1296@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1297
1298The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1299the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1300of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1301forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1302Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1303from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1304This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1305and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1306duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1307paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1308
252b5132 1309@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1310@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1311@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1312Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1313address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1314times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1315limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1316context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1317symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1318constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1319using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1320Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1321space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1322@var{expression}.
1323
1324@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1325@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1326@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1327@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1328@itemx --no-demangle
1329These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1330and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1331present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1332underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1333mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1334different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1335to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1336demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1337is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1338
1339@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1340@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1341@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1342@item -I@var{file}
1343@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1344Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1345generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1346linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1347doing.
1348
7ce691ae 1349@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1350@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1351@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1352@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1353Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1354with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1355
252b5132
RH
1356@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1357@item --force-exe-suffix
1358Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1359
1360If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1361@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1362the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1363option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1364Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1365it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1366
1367@kindex --gc-sections
1368@kindex --no-gc-sections
1369@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1370@item --gc-sections
1371@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1372Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1373targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1374performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1375@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1376
d5465ba2
AM
1377@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1378examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1379symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1380command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1381referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1382libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1383referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1384the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1385relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1386
ac69cbc6 1387This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
fc073cb7 1388@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1389specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1390a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1391
c17d87de
NC
1392@kindex --print-gc-sections
1393@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1394@cindex garbage collection
1395@item --print-gc-sections
1396@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1397List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1398printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1399collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1400default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1401be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1402line.
1403
252b5132
RH
1404@cindex help
1405@cindex usage
1406@kindex --help
1407@item --help
1408Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1409
ea20a7da
CC
1410@kindex --target-help
1411@item --target-help
1412Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1413
2509a395
SL
1414@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1415@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1416Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1417@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1418
1419@cindex memory usage
1420@kindex --no-keep-memory
1421@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1422@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1423symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1424instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1425necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1426while linking a large executable.
1427
1428@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1429@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1430@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1431@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1432Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1433is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1434The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1435behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1436libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1437
aa713662
L
1438@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1439@kindex -z muldefs
1440@item --allow-multiple-definition
1441@itemx -z muldefs
1442Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1443report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1444first definition will be used.
1445
b79e8c78 1446@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1447@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1448@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1449@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1450Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1451This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1452determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1453shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1454how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1455
903249d7
NC
1456The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1457referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1458an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1459a shared library.
1460
1461The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1462libraries specified at link time are that:
1463
1464@itemize @bullet
1465@item
1466A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1467that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1468resolvable at load time.
1469@item
1470There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1471symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1472
1473The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1474select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1475architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1476appropriate memset function.
1477@end itemize
b79e8c78 1478
31941635
L
1479@kindex --no-undefined-version
1480@item --no-undefined-version
1481Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1482it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1483will be issued instead.
1484
3e3b46e5
PB
1485@kindex --default-symver
1486@item --default-symver
1487Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1488exported symbols.
1489
1490@kindex --default-imported-symver
1491@item --default-imported-symver
1492Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1493imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1494
252b5132
RH
1495@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1496@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1497Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1498files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1499been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1500This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1501errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1502have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1503inappropriate.
1504
fe7929ce
AM
1505@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1506@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1507Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1508library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1509
252b5132
RH
1510@kindex --no-whole-archive
1511@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1512Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1513archive files.
1514
1515@cindex output file after errors
1516@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1517@item --noinhibit-exec
1518Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1519Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1520errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1521when it issues any error whatsoever.
1522
0a9c1c8e
CD
1523@kindex -nostdlib
1524@item -nostdlib
1525Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1526command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1527(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1528
252b5132 1529@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1530@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1531@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1532@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1533file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1534@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1535object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1536object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1537should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1538usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1539name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1540list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1541command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1542this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1543@end ifclear
1544
36af4a4e
JJ
1545@kindex -pie
1546@kindex --pic-executable
1547@item -pie
1548@itemx --pic-executable
1549@cindex position independent executables
1550Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1551ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1552libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1553address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1554normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1555defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1556
252b5132
RH
1557@kindex -qmagic
1558@item -qmagic
1559This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1560
1561@kindex -Qy
1562@item -Qy
1563This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1564
1565@kindex --relax
1566@cindex synthesizing linker
1567@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1568@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1569@item --relax
28d5f677 1570@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1571An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1572@ifset GENERIC
1573This option is only supported on a few targets.
1574@end ifset
1575@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1576@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1577@end ifset
1578@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1579@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1580@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1581@ifset XTENSA
1582@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1583@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1584@ifset M68HC11
1585@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1586@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1587@ifset POWERPC
1588@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1589@end ifset
252b5132 1590
28d5f677
NC
1591On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1592global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1593addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1594synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1595instructions, and combinig constant values.
252b5132
RH
1596
1597On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1598debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1599@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1600This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1601family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1602@end ifset
1603
1604@ifset GENERIC
1605On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1606but ignored.
1607@end ifset
1608
28d5f677
NC
1609On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1610@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1611
252b5132
RH
1612@cindex retaining specified symbols
1613@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1614@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1615@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1616@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1617Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1618discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1619symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1620@ifset GENERIC
1621(such as VxWorks)
1622@end ifset
1623where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1624run-time memory.
1625
1626@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1627or symbols needed for relocations.
1628
1629You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1630line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1631
1632@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1633@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1634@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1635@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1636Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1637linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1638arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1639them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1640also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1641objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1642@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1643ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1644@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1645
ff5dcc92 1646The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1647SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1648@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1649runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1650options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1651gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1652file systems.
252b5132 1653
ff5dcc92 1654For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1655followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1656the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1657@end ifset
1658
1659@ifset GENERIC
1660@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1661@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1662@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1663When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1664happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1665of the input files.
1666
1667When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1668non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1669shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1670explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1671specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1672@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1673either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1674appearing multiple times.
1675
28c309a2
NC
1676This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1677that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1678is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1679runtime linker would do.
1680
252b5132 1681The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1682libraries:
252b5132
RH
1683@enumerate
1684@item
ff5dcc92 1685Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1686@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1687Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1688between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1689specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1690used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1691at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1692by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1693the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1694@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1695On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1696@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1697environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1698@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1699On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1700directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1701@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1702For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1703variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1704@item
ec4eb78a
L
1705For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1706@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1707libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1708@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1709@item
252b5132
RH
1710The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1711@item
1712For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1713exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1714@end enumerate
1715
1716If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1717warning and continue with the link.
1718@end ifset
1719
1720@kindex -shared
1721@kindex -Bshareable
1722@item -shared
1723@itemx -Bshareable
1724@cindex shared libraries
1725Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1726and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1727shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1728undefined symbols in the link.
1729
252b5132 1730@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1731@item --sort-common
1732@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1733@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1734This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1735ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1736sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1737eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1738between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1739specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1740
2509a395
SL
1741@kindex --sort-section=name
1742@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1743This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1744patterns in the linker script.
1745
2509a395
SL
1746@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1747@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1748This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1749patterns in the linker script.
1750
252b5132 1751@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1752@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1753Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1754each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1755size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1756
1757@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1758@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1759Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1760output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1761This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1762certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1763cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1764that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1765support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1766input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1767more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1768many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1769
1770@kindex --stats
1771@item --stats
1772Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1773as execution time and memory usage.
1774
2509a395 1775@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1776@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1777Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1778configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1779that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1780
252b5132
RH
1781@kindex --traditional-format
1782@cindex traditional format
1783@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1784For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1785the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1786use the traditional format instead.
1787
1788@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1789For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1790symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1791full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1792@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1793trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1794combine duplicate entries.
1795
2509a395
SL
1796@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1797@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1798Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1799address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1800times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1801line.
1802@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1803for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1804@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1805should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1806sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1807
2509a395
SL
1808@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1809@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1810@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1811@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1812@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1813@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1814@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1815Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1816@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1817
2509a395
SL
1818@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1819@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1820@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1821When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1822of the first byte of the text segment.
1823
560e09e9
NC
1824@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1825@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1826Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1827values for @samp{method}:
1828
1829@table @samp
1830@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1831Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1832
1833@item report-all
da8bce14 1834Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1835
1836@item ignore-in-object-files
1837Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1838ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1839
1840@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1841Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1842ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1843when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1844libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1845command line.
1846@end table
1847
1848The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1849by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1850
1851Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1852unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1853can change this to a warning.
1854
252b5132
RH
1855@kindex --verbose
1856@cindex verbose
1857@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1858@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1859Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1860supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1861the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1862
1863@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1864@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1865@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1866Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1867used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1868about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1869is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1870see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1871use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1872symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1873@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1874
7ce691ae 1875@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1876@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1877@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1878@item --warn-common
1879Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1880a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1881but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1882you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1883Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1884warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1885
1886There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1887
1888@table @samp
1889@item int i = 1;
1890A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1891file.
1892
1893@item extern int i;
1894An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1895There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1896variable somewhere.
1897
1898@item int i;
1899A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1900variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1901The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1902single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1903size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1904a definition of the same variable.
1905@end table
1906
1907The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1908Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1909just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1910encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1911a common symbol.
1912
1913@enumerate
1914@item
1915Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1916definition for the symbol.
1917@smallexample
1918@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1919 overridden by definition
1920@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1921@end smallexample
1922
1923@item
1924Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1925the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1926except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1927@smallexample
1928@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1929 overriding common
1930@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1931@end smallexample
1932
1933@item
1934Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1935@smallexample
1936@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1937 of `@var{symbol}'
1938@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1939@end smallexample
1940
1941@item
1942Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1943@smallexample
1944@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1945 overridden by larger common
1946@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1947@end smallexample
1948
1949@item
1950Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1951the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1952encountered in a different order.
1953@smallexample
1954@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1955 overriding smaller common
1956@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1957@end smallexample
1958@end enumerate
1959
1960@kindex --warn-constructors
1961@item --warn-constructors
1962Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1963object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1964detect the use of global constructors.
1965
1966@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1967@item --warn-multiple-gp
1968Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1969This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1970Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1971section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1972of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1973base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1974base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1975bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1976large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1977values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1978option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1979
1980@kindex --warn-once
1981@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1982@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1983@item --warn-once
1984Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1985which refers to it.
1986
1987@kindex --warn-section-align
1988@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1989@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1990@item --warn-section-align
1991Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1992alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1993The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1994is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1995the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1996
8fdd7217
NC
1997@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1998@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1999Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2000
a0c402a5
L
2001@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2002@item --warn-alternate-em
2003Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2004
560e09e9
NC
2005@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2006@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2007If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2008@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2009This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2010
2011@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2012@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2013This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2014it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2015
252b5132
RH
2016@kindex --whole-archive
2017@cindex including an entire archive
2018@item --whole-archive
2019For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2020@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2021in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2022files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2023library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2024library. This option may be used more than once.
2025
7ec229ce 2026Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2027about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2028Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2029list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2030your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2031
2509a395
SL
2032@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2033@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2034Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2035@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2036undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2037@var{symbol}.
2038
2039This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2040wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2041wishes to call the system function, it should call
2042@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2043
2044Here is a trivial example:
2045
2046@smallexample
2047void *
cc2f008e 2048__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2049@{
cc2f008e 2050 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2051 return __real_malloc (c);
2052@}
2053@end smallexample
2054
ff5dcc92 2055If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2056all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2057instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2058call the real @code{malloc} function.
2059
2060You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2061links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2062you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2063file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2064call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2065
6aa29e7b
JJ
2066@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2067@item --eh-frame-hdr
2068Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2069@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2070
6c1439be
L
2071@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2072@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2073@item --enable-new-dtags
2074@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2075This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2076systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2077@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2078If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2079created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2080those options are only available for ELF systems.
2081
2d643429 2082@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2083@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2084Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2085close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2086time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2087increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2088value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2089
fdc90cb4
JJ
2090@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2091@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2092Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2093@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2094new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2095the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2096hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2097
35835446
JR
2098@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2099@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2100This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2101linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2102for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2103about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2104
4f9c04f7 2105Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21061021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2107run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2108has been used.
2109
2110The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2111enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2112
c0065db7
RM
2113@kindex --build-id
2114@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2115@item --build-id
2116@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2117Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2118The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2119file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2120@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2121parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2122@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2123@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2124an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2125characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2126omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2127
2128The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2129that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2130unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2131to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2132file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2133string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2134
2135Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2136@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2137@end table
2138
0285c67d
NC
2139@c man end
2140
36f63dca 2141@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2142
0285c67d
NC
2143@c man begin OPTIONS
2144
ff5dcc92 2145The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2146the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2147normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2148use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2149@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2150like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2151symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2152object file).
2153
2154In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2155support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2156PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2157values by either a space or an equals sign.
2158
ff5dcc92 2159@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2160
2161@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2162@item --add-stdcall-alias
2163If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2164as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2165[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2166
2167@kindex --base-file
2168@item --base-file @var{file}
2169Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2170addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2171@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2172[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2173
2174@kindex --dll
2175@item --dll
2176Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2177@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2178file.
bb10df36 2179[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2180
88183869
DK
2181@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2182@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2183@item --enable-long-section-names
2184@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2185The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2186the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2187for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2188fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2189to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2190allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2191disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2192generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2193as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2194with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2195GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2196information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2197option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2198section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2199when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2200image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2201[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2202
252b5132
RH
2203@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2204@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2205@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2206@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2207If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2208do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2209only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2210resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2211undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2212@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2213to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2214warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2215import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2216to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2217feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2218@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2219mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2220[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2221
522f09cd
KT
2222@kindex --leading-underscore
2223@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2224@item --leading-underscore
2225@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2226For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2227in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2228disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2229
252b5132
RH
2230@cindex DLLs, creating
2231@kindex --export-all-symbols
2232@item --export-all-symbols
2233If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2234be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2235otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2236explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2237attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2238option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2239@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2240@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2241exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2242re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2243such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2244@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2245@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2246Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2247not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2248extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2249(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2250These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2251@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2252@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2253@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2254@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2255[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2256
2257@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2258@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2259Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2260exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2261[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2262
2927aaca
NC
2263@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2264@item --exclude-all-symbols
2265Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2266[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2267
252b5132
RH
2268@kindex --file-alignment
2269@item --file-alignment
2270Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2271file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2272512.
bb10df36 2273[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2274
2275@cindex heap size
2276@kindex --heap
2277@item --heap @var{reserve}
2278@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2279Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2280to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2281committed.
bb10df36 2282[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2283
2284@cindex image base
2285@kindex --image-base
2286@item --image-base @var{value}
2287Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2288the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2289is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2290your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2291other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2292for dlls.
bb10df36 2293[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2294
2295@kindex --kill-at
2296@item --kill-at
2297If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2298symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2299[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2300
26d2d8a2
BF
2301@kindex --large-address-aware
2302@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2303If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2304header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2305greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2306or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2307section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2308[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2309
252b5132
RH
2310@kindex --major-image-version
2311@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2312Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2313[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2314
2315@kindex --major-os-version
2316@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2317Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2318[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2319
2320@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2321@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2322Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2323[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2324
2325@kindex --minor-image-version
2326@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2327Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2328[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2329
2330@kindex --minor-os-version
2331@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2332Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2333[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2334
2335@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2336@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2337Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2338[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2339
2340@cindex DEF files, creating
2341@cindex DLLs, creating
2342@kindex --output-def
2343@item --output-def @var{file}
2344The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2345file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2346(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2347library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2348automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2349[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2350
b044cda1
CW
2351@cindex DLLs, creating
2352@kindex --out-implib
2353@item --out-implib @var{file}
2354The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2355import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2356import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2357may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2358makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2359creation step.
bb10df36 2360[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2361
2362@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2363@item --enable-auto-image-base
2364Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2365using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2366from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2367collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2368avoided.
bb10df36 2369[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2370
2371@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2372@item --disable-auto-image-base
2373Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2374user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2375default.
bb10df36 2376[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2377
2378@cindex DLLs, linking to
2379@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2380@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2381When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2382search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2383@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2384between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2385uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2386@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2387[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2388
2389@kindex --enable-auto-import
2390@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2391Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2392DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2393building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2394'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2395to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2396specification published by Microsoft.
2397
e2a83dd0
NC
2398Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2399data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2400placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2401around a problem with consts that is described here:
2402http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2403
4d8907ac
DS
2404Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2405see this message:
0d888aac 2406
ece2d90e 2407"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2408documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2409
ece2d90e
NC
2410This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2411ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2412allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2413fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2414constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2415multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2416this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2417of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2418the warning, and exit.
2419
2420There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2421data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2422
2fa9fc65
NC
2423One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2424of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2425this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2426
c0065db7
RM
2427A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2428that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2429there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2430a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2431
2432@example
2433extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2434extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2435 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2436@end example
2437
2438or
2439
2440@example
2441extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2442extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2443 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2444@end example
2445
c0065db7 2446For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2447is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2448
2449@example
2450extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2451extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2452 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2453@end example
2454
c406afaf
NC
2455or
2456
2457@example
2458extern long long extern_ll;
2459extern_ll -->
2460 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2461@end example
2462
2fa9fc65 2463A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2464'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2465@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2466requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2467building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2468merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2469between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2470constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2471
2472Original:
2473@example
2474--foo.h
2475extern int arr[];
2476--foo.c
2477#include "foo.h"
2478void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2479 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2480@}
2481@end example
2482
2483Solution 1:
2484@example
2485--foo.h
2486extern int arr[];
2487--foo.c
2488#include "foo.h"
2489void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2490 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2491 volatile int *parr = arr;
2492 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2493@}
2494@end example
2495
2496Solution 2:
2497@example
2498--foo.h
2499/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2500#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2501 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2502#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2503#else
2504#define FOO_IMPORT
2505#endif
2506extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2507--foo.c
2508#include "foo.h"
2509void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2510 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2511@}
2512@end example
2513
c0065db7 2514A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2515library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2516for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2517functions).
bb10df36 2518[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2519
2520@kindex --disable-auto-import
2521@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2522Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2523@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2524[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2525
2fa9fc65
NC
2526@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2527@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2528If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2529that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2530a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2531environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2532[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2533
2534@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2535@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2536Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2537DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2538[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2539
b044cda1
CW
2540@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2541@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2542Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2543[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2544
252b5132
RH
2545@kindex --section-alignment
2546@item --section-alignment
2547Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2548addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2549[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2550
2551@cindex stack size
2552@kindex --stack
2553@item --stack @var{reserve}
2554@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2555Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2556to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2557committed.
bb10df36 2558[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2559
2560@kindex --subsystem
2561@item --subsystem @var{which}
2562@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2563@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2564Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2565legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2566@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2567the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2568@var{which}.
bb10df36 2569[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2570
2f563b51
DK
2571The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2572of the PE file header:
2573[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2574
2575@kindex --dynamicbase
2576@item --dynamicbase
2577The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2578randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2579Vista for i386 PE targets.
2580
2581@kindex --forceinteg
2582@item --forceinteg
2583Code integrity checks are enforced.
2584
2585@kindex --nxcompat
2586@item --nxcompat
2587The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2588This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2589
2590@kindex --no-isolation
2591@item --no-isolation
2592Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2593
2594@kindex --no-seh
2595@item --no-seh
2596The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2597this image.
2598
2599@kindex --no-bind
2600@item --no-bind
2601Do not bind this image.
2602
2603@kindex --wdmdriver
2604@item --wdmdriver
2605The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2606
2607@kindex --tsaware
2608@item --tsaware
2609The image is Terminal Server aware.
2610
252b5132
RH
2611@end table
2612
0285c67d
NC
2613@c man end
2614
93fd0973
SC
2615@ifset M68HC11
2616@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2617
2618@c man begin OPTIONS
2619
2620The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2621memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2622
2623@table @gcctabopt
2624
2625@kindex --no-trampoline
2626@item --no-trampoline
2627This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2628is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2629instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2630
2631@kindex --bank-window
2632@item --bank-window @var{name}
2633This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2634the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2635The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2636paging and addresses within the memory window.
2637
2638@end table
2639
2640@c man end
2641@end ifset
2642
7fb9f789
NC
2643@ifset M68K
2644@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2645
2646@c man begin OPTIONS
2647
2648The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2649when linking for 68K targets.
2650
2651@table @gcctabopt
2652
2653@kindex --got
2654@item --got=@var{type}
2655This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2656@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2657@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2658Info entry for @file{ld}.
2659
2660@end table
2661
2662@c man end
2663@end ifset
2664
252b5132
RH
2665@ifset UsesEnvVars
2666@node Environment
2667@section Environment Variables
2668
0285c67d
NC
2669@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2670
560e09e9 2671You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2672@ifclear SingleFormat
2673@code{GNUTARGET},
2674@end ifclear
2675@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2676
36f63dca 2677@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2678@kindex GNUTARGET
2679@cindex default input format
2680@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2681use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2682of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2683@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2684of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2685attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2686this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2687there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2688object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2689BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2690in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2691@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2692
2693@kindex LDEMULATION
2694@cindex default emulation
2695@cindex emulation, default
2696@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2697@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2698behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2699available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2700the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2701variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2702linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2703
2704@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2705@cindex demangling, default
2706Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2707@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2708default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2709a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2710may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2711options.
2712
0285c67d
NC
2713@c man end
2714@end ifset
2715
252b5132
RH
2716@node Scripts
2717@chapter Linker Scripts
2718
2719@cindex scripts
2720@cindex linker scripts
2721@cindex command files
2722Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2723written in the linker command language.
2724
2725The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2726the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2727the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2728more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2729direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2730described below.
2731
2732The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2733yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2734linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2735to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2736such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2737
2738You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2739line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2740default linker script.
2741
2742You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2743to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2744Linker Scripts}.
2745
2746@menu
2747* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2748* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2749* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2750* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2751* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2752* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2753* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2754* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2755* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2756* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2757* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2758@end menu
2759
2760@node Basic Script Concepts
2761@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2762@cindex linker script concepts
2763We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2764describe the linker script language.
2765
2766The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2767file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2768@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2769The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2770purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2771among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2772section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2773in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2774
2775Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2776also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2777contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2778the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2779A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2780area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2781loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2782which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2783of debugging information.
2784
2785Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2786first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2787the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2788@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2789section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2790same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2791is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2792(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2793based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2794RAM address would be the VMA.
2795
2796You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2797program with the @samp{-h} option.
2798
2799Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2800@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2801has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2802information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2803will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2804static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2805referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2806
2807You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2808program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2809option.
2810
2811@node Script Format
2812@section Linker Script Format
2813@cindex linker script format
2814Linker scripts are text files.
2815
2816You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2817either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2818symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2819generally ignored.
2820
2821Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2822If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2823otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2824double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2825file name.
2826
2827You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2828@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2829to whitespace.
2830
2831@node Simple Example
2832@section Simple Linker Script Example
2833@cindex linker script example
2834@cindex example of linker script
2835Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2836
2837The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2838@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2839memory layout of the output file.
2840
2841The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2842describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2843code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2844@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2845Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2846your input files.
2847
2848For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
28490x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2850linker script which will do that:
2851@smallexample
2852SECTIONS
2853@{
2854 . = 0x10000;
2855 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2856 . = 0x8000000;
2857 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2858 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2859@}
2860@end smallexample
2861
2862You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2863followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2864descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2865
252b5132
RH
2866The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2867sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2868counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2869other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2870current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2871incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2872@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2873
2874The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2875required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2876after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2877which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2878wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2879means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2880
2881Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2882@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2883@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2884
2885The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2886the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2887at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2888output section, the value of the location counter will be
2889@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2890effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2891immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2892
2893The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2894alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2895example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2896sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2897may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2898sections.
2899
2900That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2901
2902@node Simple Commands
2903@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2904@cindex linker script simple commands
2905In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2906
2907@menu
2908* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2909* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2910@ifclear SingleFormat
2911* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2912@end ifclear
2913
4a93e180 2914* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2915* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2916@end menu
2917
2918@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2919@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2920@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2921@cindex start of execution
2922@cindex first instruction
2923@cindex entry point
2924The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2925point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2926entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2927@smallexample
2928ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2929@end smallexample
2930
2931There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2932entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2933stopping when one of them succeeds:
2934@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2935@item
252b5132 2936the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2937@item
252b5132 2938the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2939@item
3ab904c4
NC
2940the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
2941targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2942check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 2943@item
252b5132 2944the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2945@item
252b5132
RH
2946The address @code{0}.
2947@end itemize
2948
2949@node File Commands
36f63dca 2950@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2951@cindex linker script file commands
2952Several linker script commands deal with files.
2953
2954@table @code
2955@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2956@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2957@cindex including a linker script
2958Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2959be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2960with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
296110 levels deep.
2962
4006703d
NS
2963You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2964@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2965
252b5132
RH
2966@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2967@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2968@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2969@cindex input files in linker scripts
2970@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2971@cindex linker script input object files
2972The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2973in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2974
2975For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2976a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2977then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2978
2979In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2980script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2981
e3f2db7f
AO
2982In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2983with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2984located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2985for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2986open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2987linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2988description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2989
ff5dcc92 2990If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2991name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2992@samp{-l}.
2993
2994When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2995files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2996script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2997
2998@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2999@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3000@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3001@cindex grouping input files
3002The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3003files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3004new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3005in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3006
b717d30e
JJ
3007@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3008@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3009@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3010This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3011commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3012as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3013with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3014when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3015@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3016and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3017setting afterwards.
3018
252b5132
RH
3019@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3020@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3021@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3022The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3023@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3024@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3025Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3026precedence.
3027
3028You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3029output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3030
3031@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3032@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3033@cindex library search path in linker script
3034@cindex archive search path in linker script
3035@cindex search path in linker script
3036The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3037@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3038@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3039on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3040are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3041the command line option are searched first.
3042
3043@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3044@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3045@cindex first input file
3046The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3047that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3048though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3049when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3050first file.
3051@end table
3052
3053@ifclear SingleFormat
3054@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3055@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3056A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3057
3058@table @code
3059@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3060@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3061@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3062@cindex output file format in linker script
3063The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3064output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3065exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3066(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3067line option takes precedence.
3068
3069You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3070formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3071This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3072desired endianness.
3073
3074If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3075will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3076output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3077used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3078
3079For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3080command:
3081@smallexample
3082OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3083@end smallexample
3084This says that the default format for the output file is
3085@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3086option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3087format.
3088
3089@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3090@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3091@cindex input file format in linker script
3092The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3093files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3094This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3095(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3096is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3097command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3098@end table
3099@end ifclear
3100
4a93e180
NC
3101@node REGION_ALIAS
3102@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3103@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3104@cindex region alias
3105@cindex region names
3106
3107Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3108@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3109
3110@smallexample
3111REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3112@end smallexample
3113
3114The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3115memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3116to memory regions. An example follows.
3117
3118Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3119memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3120that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3121non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3122access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3123read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3124sections:
3125
3126@itemize @bullet
3127@item
3128@code{.text} program code;
3129@item
3130@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3131@item
3132@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3133@item
3134@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3135@end itemize
3136
3137The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3138part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3139output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3140systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3141@code{C}:
3142@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3143@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3144@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3145@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3146@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3147@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3148@end multitable
3149The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3150loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3151the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3152the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3153
3154The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3155includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3156memory layout:
3157@smallexample
3158INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3159
3160SECTIONS
3161 @{
3162 .text :
3163 @{
3164 *(.text)
3165 @} > REGION_TEXT
3166 .rodata :
3167 @{
3168 *(.rodata)
3169 rodata_end = .;
3170 @} > REGION_RODATA
3171 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3172 @{
3173 data_start = .;
3174 *(.data)
3175 @} > REGION_DATA
3176 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3177 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3178 .bss :
3179 @{
3180 *(.bss)
3181 @} > REGION_BSS
3182 @}
3183@end smallexample
3184
3185Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3186regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3187variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3188@table @code
3189@item A
3190Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3191@smallexample
3192MEMORY
3193 @{
3194 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3195 @}
3196
3197REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3198REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3199REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3200REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3201@end smallexample
3202@item B
3203Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3204into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3205@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3206@smallexample
3207MEMORY
3208 @{
3209 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3210 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3211 @}
3212
3213REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3214REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3215REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3216REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3217@end smallexample
3218@item C
3219Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3220@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3221initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3222system start into the @code{RAM}.
3223@smallexample
3224MEMORY
3225 @{
3226 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3227 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3228 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3229 @}
3230
3231REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3232REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3233REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3234REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3235@end smallexample
3236@end table
3237
3238It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3239@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3240necessary:
3241@smallexample
3242#include <string.h>
3243
3244extern char data_start [];
3245extern char data_size [];
3246extern char data_load_start [];
3247
3248void copy_data(void)
3249@{
3250 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3251 @{
3252 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3253 @}
3254@}
3255@end smallexample
3256
252b5132 3257@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3258@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3259There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3260
3261@table @code
3262@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3263@kindex ASSERT
3264@cindex assertion in linker script
3265Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3266with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3267
3268@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3269@kindex EXTERN
3270@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3271Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3272symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3273modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3274each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3275command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3276
3277@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3278@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3279@cindex common allocation in linker script
3280This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3281to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3282output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3283
4818e05f
AM
3284@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3285@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3286@cindex common allocation in linker script
3287This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3288command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3289to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3290
53d25da6
AM
3291@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3292@kindex INSERT
3293@cindex insert user script into default script
3294This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3295augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3296inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3297@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3298default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3299sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3300linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3301insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3302linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3303default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3304of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3305to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3306is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3307
3308@smallexample
3309SECTIONS
3310@{
3311 OVERLAY :
3312 @{
3313 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3314 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3315 @}
3316@}
3317INSERT AFTER .text;
3318@end smallexample
3319
252b5132
RH
3320@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3321@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3322@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3323This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3324references among certain output sections.
3325
3326In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3327using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3328will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3329errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3330a function defined in the other section.
3331
3332The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3333@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3334an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3335@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3336names.
3337
3338@ifclear SingleFormat
3339@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3340@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3341@cindex machine architecture
3342@cindex architecture
3343Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3344of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3345architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3346the @samp{-f} option.
3347@end ifclear
3348@end table
3349
3350@node Assignments
3351@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3352@cindex assignment in scripts
3353@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3354@cindex variables, defining
3355You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3356the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3357
3358@menu
3359* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3360* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3361* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3362* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3363@end menu
3364
3365@node Simple Assignments
3366@subsection Simple Assignments
3367
3368You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3369
3370@table @code
3371@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3372@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3373@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3374@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3375@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3376@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3377@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3378@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3379@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3380@end table
3381
3382The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3383@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3384defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3385
3386The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3387may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3388
3389The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3390
3391Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3392
3393You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3394statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3395section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3396
3397The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3398expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3399
3400Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3401assignments may be used:
3402
3403@smallexample
3404floating_point = 0;
3405SECTIONS
3406@{
3407 .text :
3408 @{
3409 *(.text)
3410 _etext = .;
3411 @}
156e34dd 3412 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3413 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3414@}
3415@end smallexample
3416@noindent
3417In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3418zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3419the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3420defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3421upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3422
3423@node PROVIDE
3424@subsection PROVIDE
3425@cindex PROVIDE
3426In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3427only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3428the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3429@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3430@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3431@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3432@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3433@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3434
3435Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3436@smallexample
3437SECTIONS
3438@{
3439 .text :
3440 @{
3441 *(.text)
3442 _etext = .;
3443 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3444 @}
3445@}
3446@end smallexample
3447
3448In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3449underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3450the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3451underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3452If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3453linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3454
7af8e998
L
3455@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3456@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3457@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3458Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3459hidden and won't be exported.
3460
73ae6183
NC
3461@node Source Code Reference
3462@subsection Source Code Reference
3463
3464Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3465intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3466a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3467symbol that does not have a value.
3468
3469Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3470transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3471stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3472prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3473mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3474of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3475variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3476linker script variable might be referred to as:
3477
3478@smallexample
3479 extern int foo;
3480@end smallexample
3481
3482But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3483
3484@smallexample
3485 _foo = 1000;
3486@end smallexample
3487
3488In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3489transformation has taken place.
3490
3491When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3492things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3493in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3494second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3495table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3496contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3497value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3498
3499@smallexample
3500 int foo = 1000;
3501@end smallexample
3502
3503creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3504holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3505number 1000 is initially stored.
3506
3507When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3508first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3509memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3510So:
3511
3512@smallexample
3513 foo = 1;
3514@end smallexample
3515
3516looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3517associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3518address. Whereas:
3519
3520@smallexample
3521 int * a = & foo;
3522@end smallexample
3523
3524looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3525and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3526the variable @samp{a}.
3527
3528Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3529the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3530an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3531
3532@smallexample
3533 foo = 1000;
3534@end smallexample
3535
3536creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3537the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3538address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3539linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3540access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3541
3542Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3543you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3544use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3545section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3546linker script contains these declarations:
3547
3548@smallexample
3549@group
3550 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3551 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3552 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3553@end group
3554@end smallexample
3555
3556Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3557
3558@smallexample
3559@group
3560 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3561
73ae6183
NC
3562 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3563@end group
3564@end smallexample
3565
3566Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3567
252b5132 3568@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3569@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3570@kindex SECTIONS
3571The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3572into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3573
3574The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3575@smallexample
3576SECTIONS
3577@{
3578 @var{sections-command}
3579 @var{sections-command}
3580 @dots{}
3581@}
3582@end smallexample
3583
3584Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3585
3586@itemize @bullet
3587@item
3588an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3589@item
3590a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3591@item
3592an output section description
3593@item
3594an overlay description
3595@end itemize
3596
3597The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3598@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3599those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3600understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3601the layout of the output file.
3602
3603Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3604below.
3605
3606If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3607linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3608section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3609input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3610example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3611in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3612
3613@menu
3614* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3615* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3616* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3617* Input Section:: Input section description
3618* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3619* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3620* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3621* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3622* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3623@end menu
3624
3625@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3626@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3627The full description of an output section looks like this:
3628@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3629@group
7e7d5768 3630@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3631 [AT(@var{lma})]
3632 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3633 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3634 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3635 @{
3636 @var{output-section-command}
3637 @var{output-section-command}
3638 @dots{}
562d3460 3639 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3640@end group
3641@end smallexample
3642
3643Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3644
3645The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3646name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3647The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3648
3649Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3650
3651@itemize @bullet
3652@item
3653a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3654@item
3655an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3656@item
3657data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3658@item
3659a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3660@end itemize
3661
3662@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3663@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3664@cindex name, section
3665@cindex section name
3666The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3667meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3668support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3669must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3670example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3671output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3672names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3673quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3674characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3675commas must be quoted.
3676
3677The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3678Discarding}.
3679
3680@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3681@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3682@cindex address, section
3683@cindex section address
3684The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3685address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3686the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3687based on the current value of the location counter.
3688
3689If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3690set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3691@var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3692current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3693requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3694output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3695within the output section.
3696
3697For example,
3698@smallexample
3699.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3700@end smallexample
3701@noindent
3702and
3703@smallexample
3704.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3705@end smallexample
3706@noindent
3707are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3708@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3709counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3710counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3711section.
3712
3713The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3714For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3715so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3716do something like this:
3717@smallexample
3718.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3719@end smallexample
3720@noindent
3721This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3722aligned upward to the specified value.
3723
3724Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3725location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3726sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3727
3728@node Input Section
36f63dca 3729@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3730@cindex input sections
3731@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3732The most common output section command is an input section description.
3733
3734The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3735You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3736in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3737map the input files into your memory layout.
3738
3739@menu
3740* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3741* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3742* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3743* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3744* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3745@end menu
3746
3747@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3748@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3749@cindex input section basics
3750An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3751by a list of section names in parentheses.
3752
3753The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3754describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3755
3756The most common input section description is to include all input
3757sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3758include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3759@smallexample
3760*(.text)
3761@end smallexample
3762@noindent
18625d54
CM
3763Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3764of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3765match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3766example:
252b5132 3767@smallexample
b4346c09 3768*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3769@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3770will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3771@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3772
3773There are two ways to include more than one section:
3774@smallexample
3775*(.text .rdata)
3776*(.text) *(.rdata)
3777@end smallexample
3778@noindent
3779The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3780@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3781first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3782they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3783@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3784@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3785
3786You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3787You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3788needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3789@smallexample
3790data.o(.data)
3791@end smallexample
3792
967928e9
AM
3793You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3794matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3795with no whitespace around the colon.
3796
3797@table @samp
3798@item archive:file
3799matches file within archive
3800@item archive:
3801matches the whole archive
3802@item :file
3803matches file but not one in an archive
3804@end table
3805
3806Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3807wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3808single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3809@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3810within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3811also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3812other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3813from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3814command.
3815
252b5132
RH
3816If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3817the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3818commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3819@smallexample
3820data.o
3821@end smallexample
3822
967928e9
AM
3823When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3824and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3825characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3826name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3827did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3828though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3829@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3830the archive search path.
3831
3832@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3833@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3834@cindex input section wildcards
3835@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3836@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3837@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3838In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3839name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3840
3841The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3842pattern for the file name.
3843
3844The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3845
3846@table @samp
3847@item *
3848matches any number of characters
3849@item ?
3850matches any single character
3851@item [@var{chars}]
3852matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3853character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3854@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3855@item \
3856quotes the following character
3857@end table
3858
3859When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3860will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3861Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3862exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3863@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3864a @samp{/} character.
3865
3866File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3867specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3868does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3869
3870If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3871appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3872will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3873sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3874@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3875@smallexample
3876.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3877.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3878@end smallexample
3879
bcaa7b3e 3880@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3881Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3882in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3883this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3884pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3885@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3886into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3887
bcaa7b3e
L
3888@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3889@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3890difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3891ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3892
3893@cindex SORT
3894@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3895
3896When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3897can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3898
3899@enumerate
3900@item
3901@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3902It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3903sections have the same name.
3904@item
3905@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3906It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3907sections have the same alignment.
3908@item
c0065db7 3909@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3910treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3911@item
3912@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3913is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3914@item
3915All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3916@end enumerate
3917
3918When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3919section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3920takes precedence over the command line option.
3921
3922If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3923command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3924treated as nested sorting command.
3925
3926@enumerate
3927@item
3928@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3929@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3930@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3931@item
3932@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3933@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3934@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3935@end enumerate
3936
3937If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3938command line option will be ignored.
3939
252b5132
RH
3940If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3941@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3942precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3943
3944This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3945files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3946sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3947The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3948with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3949linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3950@smallexample
3951@group
3952SECTIONS @{
3953 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3954 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3955 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3956 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3957@}
3958@end group
3959@end smallexample
3960
3961@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3962@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3963@cindex common symbol placement
3964@cindex uninitialized data placement
3965A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3966file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3967linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3968named @samp{COMMON}.
3969
3970You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3971other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3972particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3973input files are placed in another section.
3974
3975In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3976@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3977@smallexample
3978.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3979@end smallexample
3980
3981@cindex scommon section
3982@cindex small common symbols
3983Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3984example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3985symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3986different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3987the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3988symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3989to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3990locations.
3991
3992@cindex [COMMON]
3993You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3994notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3995@samp{*(COMMON)}.
3996
3997@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 3998@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
3999@cindex KEEP
4000@cindex garbage collection
4001When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4002it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4003This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4004with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4005@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4006
4007@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4008@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4009The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4010to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4011start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4012@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4013follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4014@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4015@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4016All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4017files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4018
4019@smallexample
4020@group
4021SECTIONS @{
4022 outputa 0x10000 :
4023 @{
4024 all.o
4025 foo.o (.input1)
4026 @}
36f63dca
NC
4027@end group
4028@group
252b5132
RH
4029 outputb :
4030 @{
4031 foo.o (.input2)
4032 foo1.o (.input1)
4033 @}
36f63dca
NC
4034@end group
4035@group
252b5132
RH
4036 outputc :
4037 @{
4038 *(.input1)
4039 *(.input2)
4040 @}
4041@}
4042@end group
a1ab1d2a 4043@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4044
4045@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4046@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4047@cindex data
4048@cindex section data
4049@cindex output section data
4050@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4051@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4052@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4053@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4054@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4055You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4056@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4057an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4058parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4059value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4060counter.
4061
4062The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4063store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4064bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4065stored.
4066
4067For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4068of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4069@smallexample
4070BYTE(1)
4071LONG(addr)
4072@end smallexample
4073
4074When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4075same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4076target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4077@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4078@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4079
4080If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4081which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4082When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4083true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4084endianness of the first input object file.
4085
36f63dca 4086Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4087between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4088@smallexample
4089SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4090@end smallexample
4091whereas this will work:
4092@smallexample
4093SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4094@end smallexample
4095
252b5132
RH
4096@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4097@cindex holes, filling
4098@cindex unspecified memory
4099You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4100current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4101otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4102gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4103with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4104necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4105point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4106than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4107different parts of an output section.
4108
4109This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4110value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4111@smallexample
563e308f 4112FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4113@end smallexample
4114
4115The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4116section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4117part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4118entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4119precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4120expression.
252b5132
RH
4121
4122@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4123@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4124There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4125commands.
4126
4127@table @code
4128@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4129@cindex input filename symbols
4130@cindex filename symbols
4131@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4132The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4133The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4134file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4135the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4136
4137This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4138normally used for any other object file format.
4139
4140@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4141@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4142@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4143@item CONSTRUCTORS
4144When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4145unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4146destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4147arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4148automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4149For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4150linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4151@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4152ignored for other object file formats.
4153
4154The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4155constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4156Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4157the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4158first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4159of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4160compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4161formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4162@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4163the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4164destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4165@code{exit}.
4166
4167For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4168arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4169addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4170and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4171linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4172runtime code expects to see.
4173
4174@smallexample
4175 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4176 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4177 *(.ctors)
4178 LONG(0)
4179 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4180 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4181 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4182 *(.dtors)
4183 LONG(0)
4184 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4185@end smallexample
4186
4187If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4188which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4189are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4190are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4191command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4192@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4193@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4194@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4195
4196Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4197and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4198need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4199scripts.
4200
4201@end table
4202
4203@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4204@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4205@cindex discarding sections
4206@cindex sections, discarding
4207@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4208The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4209for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4210be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4211@smallexample
49c13adb 4212.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4213@end smallexample
4214@noindent
4215will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4216@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4217sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4218space in an output section will also create the output section.
4219
a0976ea4 4220The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4221on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4222symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4223the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4224section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4225
4226@cindex /DISCARD/
4227The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4228input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4229section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4230
4231@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4232@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4233@cindex output section attributes
4234We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4235like this:
0c71d759 4236
252b5132 4237@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4238@group
7e7d5768 4239@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4240 [AT(@var{lma})]
4241 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4242 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4243 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4244 @{
4245 @var{output-section-command}
4246 @var{output-section-command}
4247 @dots{}
562d3460 4248 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4249@end group
4250@end smallexample
0c71d759 4251
252b5132
RH
4252We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4253@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4254remaining section attributes.
4255
a1ab1d2a 4256@menu
252b5132
RH
4257* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4258* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4259* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4260* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4261* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4262* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4263* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4264* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4265@end menu
4266
4267@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4268@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4269Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4270parentheses. The following types are defined:
4271
4272@table @code
4273@item NOLOAD
4274The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4275loaded into memory when the program is run.
4276@item DSECT
4277@itemx COPY
4278@itemx INFO
4279@itemx OVERLAY
4280These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4281rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4282marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4283section when the program is run.
4284@end table
4285
4286@kindex NOLOAD
4287@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4288@cindex loading, preventing
4289The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4290the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4291the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4292@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4293need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4294@smallexample
4295@group
4296SECTIONS @{
4297 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4298 @dots{}
4299@}
4300@end group
4301@end smallexample
4302
4303@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4304@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4305@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4306@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4307@cindex load address
4308@cindex section load address
4309Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4310@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
4311an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
4312Address}).
4313
dc0b6aa0
AM
4314The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
4315the load address of the section.
6bdafbeb
NC
4316
4317Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
4318specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
4319Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
4320linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4321
4322If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4323section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
4324VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
4325section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
4326or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
4327to the VMA.
6bdafbeb 4328@xref{Output Section Region}.
252b5132
RH
4329
4330@cindex ROM initialized data
4331@cindex initialized data in ROM
4332This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4333example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4334called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4335@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4336even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4337uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4338defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4339counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4340
4341@smallexample
4342@group
4343SECTIONS
4344 @{
4345 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4346 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4347 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4348 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4349 .bss 0x3000 :
4350 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4351@}
4352@end group
4353@end smallexample
4354
4355The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4356this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4357the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4358how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4359script.
4360
4361@smallexample
4362@group
4363extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4364char *src = &_etext;
4365char *dst = &_data;
4366
4367/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4368while (dst < &_edata) @{
4369 *dst++ = *src++;
4370@}
4371
4372/* Zero bss */
4373for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4374 *dst = 0;
4375@end group
4376@end smallexample
4377
bbf115d3
L
4378@node Forced Output Alignment
4379@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4380@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4381@cindex forcing output section alignment
4382@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4383You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4384
7e7d5768
AM
4385@node Forced Input Alignment
4386@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4387@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4388@cindex forcing input section alignment
4389@cindex input section alignment
4390You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4391SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4392sections, whether larger or smaller.
4393
0c71d759
NC
4394@node Output Section Constraint
4395@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4396@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4397@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4398@cindex constraints on output sections
4399You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4400of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4401read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4402@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4403
252b5132 4404@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4405@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4406@kindex >@var{region}
4407@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4408@cindex memory regions and sections
4409You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4410using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4411
4412Here is a simple example:
4413@smallexample
4414@group
4415MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4416SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4417@end group
4418@end smallexample
4419
4420@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4421@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4422@kindex :@var{phdr}
4423@cindex section, assigning to program header
4424@cindex program headers and sections
4425You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4426using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4427one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4428assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4429@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4430linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4431
4432Here is a simple example:
4433@smallexample
4434@group
4435PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4436SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4437@end group
4438@end smallexample
4439
4440@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4441@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4442@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4443@cindex section fill pattern
4444@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4445You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4446@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4447(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4448within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4449alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4450necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4451of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4452an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4453fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4454other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4455pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4456expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4457
4458You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4459output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4460
4461Here is a simple example:
4462@smallexample
4463@group
563e308f 4464SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4465@end group
4466@end smallexample
4467
4468@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4469@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4470@kindex OVERLAY
4471@cindex overlays
4472An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4473are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4474the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4475copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4476required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4477can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4478than another.
4479
4480Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4481@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4482output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4483command is as follows:
4484@smallexample
4485@group
4486OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4487 @{
4488 @var{secname1}
4489 @{
4490 @var{output-section-command}
4491 @var{output-section-command}
4492 @dots{}
4493 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4494 @var{secname2}
4495 @{
4496 @var{output-section-command}
4497 @var{output-section-command}
4498 @dots{}
4499 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4500 @dots{}
4501 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4502@end group
4503@end smallexample
4504
4505Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4506section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4507section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4508those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4509except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4510sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4511
4512The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4513addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4514memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4515whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4516and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4517and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4518
4519If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4520among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4521all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4522section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4523NOCROSSREFS}.
4524
4525For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4526provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4527defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4528@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4529the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4530within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4531symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4532
4533At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4534the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4535
4536Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4537@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4538@smallexample
4539@group
4540 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4541 @{
4542 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4543 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4544 @}
4545@end group
4546@end smallexample
4547@noindent
4548This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4549address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4550@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4551following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4552@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4553@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4554
4555C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4556like the following.
4557
4558@smallexample
4559@group
4560 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4561 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4562 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4563@end group
4564@end smallexample
4565
4566Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4567everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4568example could have been written identically as follows.
4569
4570@smallexample
4571@group
4572 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4573 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4574 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4575 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4576 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4577 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4578 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4579@end group
4580@end smallexample
4581
4582@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4583@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4584@kindex MEMORY
4585@cindex memory regions
4586@cindex regions of memory
4587@cindex allocating memory
4588@cindex discontinuous memory
4589The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4590memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4591
4592The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4593memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4594may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4595can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4596set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4597regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4598around to fit into the available regions.
4599
4600A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4601command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4602you wish. The syntax is:
4603@smallexample
4604@group
a1ab1d2a 4605MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4606 @{
4607 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4608 @dots{}
4609 @}
4610@end group
4611@end smallexample
4612
4613The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4614region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4615Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4616with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4617must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4618add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4619command.
252b5132
RH
4620
4621@cindex memory region attributes
4622The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4623whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4624not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4625@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4626section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4627the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4628them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4629
4630The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4631@table @samp
4632@item R
4633Read-only section
4634@item W
4635Read/write section
4636@item X
4637Executable section
4638@item A
4639Allocatable section
4640@item I
4641Initialized section
4642@item L
4643Same as @samp{I}
4644@item !
c09e9a8c 4645Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4646@end table
4647
4648If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4649@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4650attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4651in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4652attributes.
4653
4654@kindex ORIGIN =
4655@kindex o =
4656@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4657The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4658the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4659cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4660abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4661@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4662
4663@kindex LENGTH =
4664@kindex len =
4665@kindex l =
4666The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4667region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4668be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4669@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4670
4671In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4672available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4673and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4674linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4675is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4676or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4677explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4678region.
4679
4680@smallexample
4681@group
a1ab1d2a 4682MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4683 @{
4684 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4685 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4686 @}
4687@end group
4688@end smallexample
4689
4690Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4691specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4692@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4693a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4694output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4695was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4696the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4697output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4698region, the linker will issue an error message.
4699
3ec57632 4700It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4701expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4702@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4703
4704@smallexample
4705@group
c0065db7 4706 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4707@end group
4708@end smallexample
4709
252b5132
RH
4710@node PHDRS
4711@section PHDRS Command
4712@kindex PHDRS
4713@cindex program headers
4714@cindex ELF program headers
4715@cindex program segments
4716@cindex segments, ELF
4717The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4718@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4719loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4720program with the @samp{-p} option.
4721
4722When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4723reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4724program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4725This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4726interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4727
4728The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4729in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4730precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4731the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4732not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4733
4734The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4735generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4736ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4737
4738This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4739@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4740
4741@smallexample
4742@group
4743PHDRS
4744@{
4745 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4746 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4747@}
4748@end group
4749@end smallexample
4750
4751The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4752of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4753header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4754with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4755must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4756is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4757
4758Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4759system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4760specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4761sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4762attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4763Section Phdr}.
4764
4765It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4766merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4767repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4768contain the section.
4769
4770If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4771then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4772not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4773convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4774placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4775default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4776segment at all.
4777
4778@kindex FILEHDR
4779@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4780You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4781the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4782The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4783file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4784include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4785segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4786these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4787
4788The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4789value of the keyword.
4790
4791@table @asis
4792@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4793Indicates an unused program header.
4794
4795@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4796Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4797the file.
4798
4799@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4800Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4801
4802@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4803Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4804found.
4805
4806@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4807Indicates a segment holding note information.
4808
4809@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4810A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4811ABI.
4812
4813@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4814Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4815
4816@item @var{expression}
4817An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4818be used for types not defined above.
4819@end table
4820
4821You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4822in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4823@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4824Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4825output section attribute.
4826
4827The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4828which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4829explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4830an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4831header.
4832
4833Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4834headers used on a native ELF system.
4835
4836@example
4837@group
4838PHDRS
4839@{
4840 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4841 interp PT_INTERP ;
4842 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4843 data PT_LOAD ;
4844 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4845@}
4846
4847SECTIONS
4848@{
4849 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4850 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4851 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4852 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4853 @dots{}
4854 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4855 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4856 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4857 @dots{}
4858@}
4859@end group
4860@end example
4861
4862@node VERSION
4863@section VERSION Command
4864@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4865@cindex symbol versions
4866@cindex version script
4867@cindex versions of symbols
4868The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4869only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4870symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4871a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4872shared library.
4873
4874You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4875you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4876also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4877
4878The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4879@smallexample
4880VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4881@end smallexample
4882
4883The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4884Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4885version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4886version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4887version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4888scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4889library.
4890
4891The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4892examples.
4893
4894@smallexample
4895VERS_1.1 @{
4896 global:
4897 foo1;
4898 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4899 old*;
4900 original*;
4901 new*;
252b5132
RH
4902@};
4903
4904VERS_1.2 @{
4905 foo2;
4906@} VERS_1.1;
4907
4908VERS_2.0 @{
4909 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4910 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 4911 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
4912 "f(int, double)";
4913 @};
252b5132
RH
4914@} VERS_1.2;
4915@end smallexample
4916
4917This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4918version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4919The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4920a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4921of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4922symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4923is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4924in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4925However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4926name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4927
4928Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4929depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4930to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4931
4932Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4933depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4934and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4935
4936When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4937specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4938unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4939unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
4940somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4941wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4942wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4943set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4944ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
4945
4946The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4947they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4948could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4949However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4950
0f6bf451 4951Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4952in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4953symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4954won't.
4955
4956@smallexample
7c9c73be 4957@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4958@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4959
252b5132
RH
4960When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4961symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4962requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4963shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4964loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4965linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4966application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4967way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4968all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4969search for each symbol reference.
4970
4971The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4972doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4973that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4974functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4975the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4976required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4977that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4978versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4979the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4980
4981There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4982first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4983source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4984script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4985maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4986@smallexample
4987__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4988@end smallexample
4989@noindent
4990in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4991be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4992The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
4993@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4994takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
4995
4996The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4997function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4998an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4999version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5000linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5001
5002To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5003source file. Here is an example:
5004
5005@smallexample
5006__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5007__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5008__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5009__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5010@end smallexample
5011
5012In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5013unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5014example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5015@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5016
5017When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5018some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5019this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5020@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5021declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5022you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5023
5024If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5025within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5026(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5027specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5028
cb840a31
L
5029You can also specify the language in the version script:
5030
5031@smallexample
5032VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5033@end smallexample
5034
c0065db7 5035The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5036The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5037demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5038patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5039@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5040
86043bbb
MM
5041Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5042described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5043or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5044the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5045whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5046cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5047might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5048should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5049expect when you upgrade.
5050
252b5132
RH
5051@node Expressions
5052@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5053@cindex expressions
5054@cindex arithmetic
5055The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5056that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5057expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5058host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5059
5060You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5061
5062The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5063expressions.
5064
5065@menu
5066* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5067* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5068* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5069* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5070* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5071* Operators:: Operators
5072* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5073* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5074* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5075@end menu
5076
5077@node Constants
5078@subsection Constants
5079@cindex integer notation
5080@cindex constants in linker scripts
5081All constants are integers.
5082
5083As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5084octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
5085hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5086@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5087@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5088value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5089
5090@cindex scaled integers
5091@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5092@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5093@cindex suffixes for integers
5094@cindex integer suffixes
5095In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5096constant by
5097@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5098@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5099@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5100@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5101@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5102@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5103@tex
5104${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5105@end tex
5106@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5107respectively. For example, the following
5108all refer to the same quantity:
5109
252b5132 5110@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5111_fourk_1 = 4K;
5112_fourk_2 = 4096;
5113_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5114_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5115@end smallexample
5116
8a308ae8
NC
5117Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5118conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5119
0c71d759
NC
5120@node Symbolic Constants
5121@subsection Symbolic Constants
5122@cindex symbolic constants
5123@kindex CONSTANT
5124It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5125the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5126
5127@table @code
5128@item MAXPAGESIZE
5129@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5130The target's maximum page size.
5131
5132@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5133@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5134The target's default page size.
5135@end table
5136
5137So for example:
5138
5139@smallexample
5140 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5141@end smallexample
5142
5143will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5144supported by the target.
5145
252b5132
RH
5146@node Symbols
5147@subsection Symbol Names
5148@cindex symbol names
5149@cindex names
5150@cindex quoted symbol names
5151@kindex "
5152Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5153and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5154Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5155specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5156keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5157@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5158"SECTION" = 9;
5159"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5160@end smallexample
5161
5162Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5163to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5164whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5165
ecca9871
L
5166@node Orphan Sections
5167@subsection Orphan Sections
5168@cindex orphan
5169Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5170are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5171script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5172output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5173placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5174attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5175same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5176If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5177at the end of the file.
5178
5179For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5180well as section flag.
5181
41911f68 5182If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5183the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5184__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5185section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5186orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5187representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5188character.
5189
252b5132
RH
5190@node Location Counter
5191@subsection The Location Counter
5192@kindex .
5193@cindex dot
5194@cindex location counter
5195@cindex current output location
5196The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5197current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5198location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5199within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5200anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5201
5202@cindex holes
5203Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5204moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5205location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5206and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5207doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5208
5209@smallexample
5210SECTIONS
5211@{
5212 output :
5213 @{
5214 file1(.text)
5215 . = . + 1000;
5216 file2(.text)
5217 . += 1000;
5218 file3(.text)
563e308f 5219 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5220@}
5221@end smallexample
5222@noindent
5223In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5224located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5225followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5226@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5227@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5228specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5229
5c6bbab8
NC
5230@cindex dot inside sections
5231Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5232current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5233statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5234absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5235however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5236not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5237
5238@smallexample
5239SECTIONS
5240@{
5241 . = 0x100
5242 .text: @{
5243 *(.text)
5244 . = 0x200
5245 @}
5246 . = 0x500
5247 .data: @{
5248 *(.data)
5249 . += 0x600
5250 @}
5251@}
5252@end smallexample
5253
5254The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5255and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5256the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5257much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5258move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5259and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5260the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5261the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5262
b5666f2f
AM
5263@cindex dot outside sections
5264Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5265output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5266needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5267
5268@smallexample
5269SECTIONS
5270@{
5271 start_of_text = . ;
5272 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5273 end_of_text = . ;
5274
5275 start_of_data = . ;
5276 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5277 end_of_data = . ;
5278@}
5279@end smallexample
5280
5281If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5282not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5283between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5284should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5285blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5286the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5287sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5288statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5289special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5290place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5291as follows:
5292
5293@smallexample
5294SECTIONS
5295@{
5296 start_of_text = . ;
5297 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5298 end_of_text = . ;
5299
5300 start_of_data = . ;
5301 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5302 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5303 end_of_data = . ;
5304@}
5305@end smallexample
5306
5307This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5308@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5309placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5310assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5311a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5312section. So you could write:
5313
5314@smallexample
5315SECTIONS
5316@{
5317 start_of_text = . ;
5318 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5319 end_of_text = . ;
5320
5321 . = . ;
5322 start_of_data = . ;
5323 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5324 end_of_data = . ;
5325@}
5326@end smallexample
5327
5328Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5329@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5330
252b5132
RH
5331@need 2000
5332@node Operators
5333@subsection Operators
5334@cindex operators for arithmetic
5335@cindex arithmetic operators
5336@cindex precedence in expressions
5337The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5338the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5339@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5340@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5341@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5342@smallexample
5343precedence associativity Operators Notes
5344(highest)
53451 left ! - ~ (1)
53462 left * / %
53473 left + -
53484 left >> <<
53495 left == != > < <= >=
53506 left &
53517 left |
53528 left &&
53539 left ||
535410 right ? :
535511 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5356(lowest)
5357@end smallexample
5358Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5359(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5360(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5361@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5362@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5363@tex
5364\vskip \baselineskip
5365%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5366\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5367\hrule
5368\halign
5369{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5370height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5371&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5372height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5373\noalign{\hrule}
5374height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5375&highest&&&&&\cr
5376% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5377&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5378&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5379&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5380&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5381&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5382&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5383&7&&left&&|&\cr
5384&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5385&9&&left&&||&\cr
5386&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5387&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5388&lowest&&&&&\cr
5389height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5390\hrule}
5391@end tex
5392@iftex
5393{
5394@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5395@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5396@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5397}
5398@end iftex
5399@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5400
5401@node Evaluation
5402@subsection Evaluation
5403@cindex lazy evaluation
5404@cindex expression evaluation order
5405The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5406an expression when absolutely necessary.
5407
5408The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5409address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5410regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5411as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5412
5413However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5414until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5415other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5416for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5417
5418The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5419assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5420allocation.
5421
5422Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5423@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5424
5425If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5426available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5427following
5428@smallexample
5429@group
5430SECTIONS
5431 @{
a1ab1d2a 5432 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5433 @{ *(.text) @}
5434 @}
5435@end group
5436@end smallexample
5437@noindent
5438will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5439address}.
5440
5441@node Expression Section
5442@subsection The Section of an Expression
5443@cindex expression sections
5444@cindex absolute expressions
5445@cindex relative expressions
5446@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5447@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5448@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5449Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5450relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5451using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5452value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5453symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5454operations.
5455
abf4be64
AM
5456Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5457section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5458address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5459@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5460functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
7542af2a
AM
5461
5462When the linker evaluates an expression, the result depends on where
5463the expression is located in a linker script. Expressions appearing
5464outside an output section definitions are evaluated with all terms
5465first being converted to absolute addresses before applying operators,
5466and evaluate to an absolute address result. Expressions appearing
5467inside an output section definition are evaluated with more complex
5468rules, but the aim is to treat terms as relative addresses and produce
5469a relative address result. In particular, an assignment of a number
5470to a symbol results in a symbol relative to the output section with an
5471offset given by the number. So, in the following simple example,
252b5132 5472
7542af2a
AM
5473@smallexample
5474@group
5475SECTIONS
5476 @{
5477 . = 0x100;
5478 __executable_start = 0x100;
5479 .data :
5480 @{
5481 . = 0x10;
5482 __data_start = 0x10;
5483 *(.data)
5484 @}
5485 @dots{}
5486 @}
5487@end group
5488@end smallexample
252b5132 5489
7542af2a
AM
5490both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5491address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5492@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5493section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5494
7542af2a
AM
5495For expressions appearing inside an output section definition
5496involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute addresses, ld
5497follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5498
5499@itemize @bullet
5500@item
5501Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5502relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5503and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5504@item
5505Unary operations on an absolute address, and binary operations on one
5506or more absolute addresses or on two relative addresses not in the
5507same section, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute
5508address before applying the operator.
5509@end itemize
5510
5511The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5512
5513@itemize @bullet
5514@item
5515An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5516@item
5517The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5518@item
5519The result of other operations on relative addresses (after above
5520conversions) is a relative address in the same section as the operand(s).
5521@item
5522The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5523conversions) is an absolute address.
5524@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5525
5526You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5527to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5528create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5529section @samp{.data}:
5530@smallexample
5531SECTIONS
5532 @{
5533 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5534 @}
5535@end smallexample
5536@noindent
5537If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5538@samp{.data} section.
5539
7542af2a
AM
5540Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5541particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5542
252b5132
RH
5543@node Builtin Functions
5544@subsection Builtin Functions
5545@cindex functions in expressions
5546The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5547use in linker script expressions.
5548
5549@table @code
5550@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5551@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5552@cindex expression, absolute
5553Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5554of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5555value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5556normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5557
5558@item ADDR(@var{section})
5559@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5560@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5561Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5562script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5563the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5564@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5565@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5566the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5567@smallexample
5568@group
5569SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5570 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5571 @{
252b5132
RH
5572 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5573 @dots{}
5574 @}
5575 .output :
5576 @{
5577 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5578 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5579 @}
5580@dots{} @}
5581@end group
5582@end smallexample
5583
876f4090
NS
5584@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5585@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5586@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5587@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5588@cindex round up location counter
5589@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5590@cindex round up expression
5591@cindex align expression
5592Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5593to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5594doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5595arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5596expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5597equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5598
5599Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5600next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5601variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5602input sections:
252b5132
RH
5603@smallexample
5604@group
5605SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5606 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5607 *(.data)
5608 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5609 @}
5610@dots{} @}
5611@end group
5612@end smallexample
5613@noindent
5614The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5615a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5616a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5617of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5618
5619The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5620
362c1d1a
NS
5621@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5622@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5623@cindex section alignment
5624Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5625been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5626evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5627the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5628value in that section.
5629@smallexample
5630@group
5631SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5632 .output @{
5633 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5634 @dots{}
5635 @}
5636@dots{} @}
5637@end group
5638@end smallexample
5639
252b5132
RH
5640@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5641@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5642This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5643scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5644section.
5645
2d20f7bf
JJ
5646@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5647@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5648This is equivalent to either
5649@smallexample
5650(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5651@end smallexample
5652or
5653@smallexample
5654(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5655@end smallexample
5656@noindent
5657depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5658for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5659@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5660If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5661memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5662bytes in the on-disk file.
5663
5664This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5665any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5666@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5667be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5668working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5669
5670@noindent
5671Example:
5672@smallexample
5673 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5674@end smallexample
5675
5676@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5677@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5678This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5679evaluation purposes.
5680
5681@smallexample
5682 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5683@end smallexample
5684
a4f5ad88
JJ
5685@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5686@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5687This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5688@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5689When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5690does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5691@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5692boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5693it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5694@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5695
5696@smallexample
5697 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5698@end smallexample
5699
252b5132
RH
5700@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5701@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5702@cindex symbol defaults
5703Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5704defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5705return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5706default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5707shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5708the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5709existed, its value is preserved:
5710
5711@smallexample
5712@group
5713SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5714 .text : @{
5715 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5716 @dots{}
5717 @}
5718 @dots{}
5719@}
5720@end group
5721@end smallexample
5722
3ec57632
NC
5723@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5724@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5725Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5726
252b5132
RH
5727@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5728@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5729@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5730Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5731Section LMA}).
5732
5733@kindex MAX
5734@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5735Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5736
5737@kindex MIN
5738@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5739Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5740
5741@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5742@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5743@cindex unallocated address, next
5744Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5745This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5746use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5747output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5748
3ec57632
NC
5749@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5750@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5751Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5752
ba916c8a
MM
5753@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5754@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5755Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5756value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5757option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5758@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5759be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5760``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5761name.
5762
252b5132
RH
5763@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5764@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5765@cindex section size
5766Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5767been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5768evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5769@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5770@smallexample
5771@group
5772SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5773 .output @{
5774 .start = . ;
5775 @dots{}
5776 .end = . ;
5777 @}
5778 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5779 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5780@dots{} @}
5781@end group
5782@end smallexample
5783
5784@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5785@itemx sizeof_headers
5786@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5787@cindex header size
5788Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5789information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5790this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5791choose, to facilitate paging.
5792
5793@cindex not enough room for program headers
5794@cindex program headers, not enough room
5795When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5796@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5797number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5798addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5799additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5800room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5801the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5802script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5803you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5804command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5805@end table
5806
5807@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5808@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5809@cindex implicit linker scripts
5810If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5811an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5812linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5813linker will report an error.
5814
5815An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5816
5817Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5818assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5819commands.
5820
5821Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5822at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5823read. This can affect archive searching.
5824
5825@ifset GENERIC
5826@node Machine Dependent
5827@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5828
5829@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5830@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5831sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5832functionality are not listed.
5833
5834@menu
36f63dca
NC
5835@ifset H8300
5836* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5837@end ifset
5838@ifset I960
5839* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5840@end ifset
5841@ifset ARM
5842* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5843@end ifset
5844@ifset HPPA
5845* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5846@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5847@ifset M68K
5848* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5849@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5850@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5851* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5852@end ifset
2469cfa2 5853@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5854* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5855@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5856@ifset M68HC11
5857* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5858@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5859@ifset POWERPC
5860* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5861@end ifset
5862@ifset POWERPC64
5863* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5864@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5865@ifset SPU
5866* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5867@end ifset
74459f0e 5868@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5869* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5870@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5871@ifset WIN32
5872* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5873@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5874@ifset XTENSA
5875* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5876@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5877@end menu
5878@end ifset
5879
252b5132
RH
5880@ifset H8300
5881@ifclear GENERIC
5882@raisesections
5883@end ifclear
5884
5885@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5886@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5887
5888@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5889For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5890you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5891
5892@table @emph
5893@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5894@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5895@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5896targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5897program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5898respectively.
5899
5900@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5901@item synthesizing instructions
5902@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5903@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5904sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5905page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5906(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5907@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5908top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5909
5910@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5911@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5912biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5913which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5914page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5915(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5916@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5917the top page of memory).
5918
5919@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5920@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
592132 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5922changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5923(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5924@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5925the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5926@end table
5927
5928@ifclear GENERIC
5929@lowersections
5930@end ifclear
5931@end ifset
5932
36f63dca 5933@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5934@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5935@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5936@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5937@node Renesas
5938@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5939
c2dcd04e
NC
5940@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5941H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5942options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5943@end ifset
5944@end ifclear
5945
5946@ifset I960
5947@ifclear GENERIC
5948@raisesections
5949@end ifclear
5950
5951@node i960
5952@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5953
5954@cindex i960 support
5955
5956You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5957specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5958family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5959incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5960linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5961libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5962search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5963
5964For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5965well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5966paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5967the names
5968
5969@smallexample
5970@group
5971try
5972libtry.a
5973tryca
5974libtryca.a
5975@end group
5976@end smallexample
5977
5978@noindent
5979The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5980two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5981
5982You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5983the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5984use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5985specifies a library.
5986
5987@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5988@cindex relaxing on i960
5989@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5990you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5991@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5992them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5993instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5994instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5995target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5996not itself call any subroutines).
5997
48229727
JB
5998@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
5999@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6000@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6001The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6002
6003The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6004
85fdf906
AH
6005@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6006@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6007The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6008
36f63dca
NC
6009@ifclear GENERIC
6010@lowersections
6011@end ifclear
6012@end ifset
6013
6014@ifset ARM
6015@ifclear GENERIC
6016@raisesections
6017@end ifclear
6018
93fd0973
SC
6019@ifset M68HC11
6020@ifclear GENERIC
6021@raisesections
6022@end ifclear
6023
6024@node M68HC11/68HC12
6025@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6026
6027@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6028
6029@subsection Linker Relaxation
6030
6031For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6032optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6033
6034@table @emph
6035@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6036@item relaxing address modes
6037@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6038targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6039program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6040respectively.
6041
6042@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6043transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6044page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6045
6046@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6047When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6048of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6049addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6050@code{bset} instructions.
6051
6052@end table
6053
6054@subsection Trampoline Generation
6055
6056@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6057@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6058For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6059call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6060will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6061trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6062case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6063point to the function trampoline.
6064
6065@ifclear GENERIC
6066@lowersections
6067@end ifclear
6068@end ifset
6069
36f63dca 6070@node ARM
3674e28a 6071@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6072
6073@cindex ARM interworking support
6074@kindex --support-old-code
6075For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6076between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6077been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6078line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6079libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6080option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6081given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6082which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6083the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6084non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6085
6086@cindex thumb entry point
6087@cindex entry point, thumb
6088@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6089The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6090@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6091But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6092branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6093executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6094
ce11ba6c
KT
6095@cindex PE import table prefixing
6096@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6097The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6098the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6099elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6100import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6101
e489d0ae
PB
6102@cindex BE8
6103@kindex --be8
6104The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6105executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6106The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6107
3674e28a
PB
6108@cindex TARGET1
6109@kindex --target1-rel
6110@kindex --target1-abs
6111The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6112@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6113or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6114and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6115
6116@cindex TARGET2
6117@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6118The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6119@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6120meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6121@table @samp
6122@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6123@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6124@item abs
6125@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6126@item got-rel
6127@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6128@end table
6129
319850b4
JB
6130@cindex FIX_V4BX
6131@kindex --fix-v4bx
6132The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6133specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6134interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6135also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6136
6137In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6138linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6139@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6140
6141In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6142relocations are ignored.
6143
845b51d6
PB
6144@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6145@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6146Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6147relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6148
6149@smallexample
6150TST rM, #1
6151MOVEQ PC, rM
6152BX Rn
6153@end smallexample
6154
6155This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6156and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6157condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6158
33bfe774
JB
6159@cindex USE_BLX
6160@kindex --use-blx
6161The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6162BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6163situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6164code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6165each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6166
6167This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6168specify it if you are using that target.
6169
c6dd86c6
JB
6170@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6171@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6172The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6173bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6174instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6175to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6176the support code can read the intended values.
6177
6178The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6179intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6180and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6181intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6182full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6183you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6184
6185If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6186enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6187@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6188mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6189vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6190@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6191
6192If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6193potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6194such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6195first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6196instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6197the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6198are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6199
bf21ed78
MS
6200@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6201@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6202The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6203warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6204enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6205linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6206using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6207not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6208
6209@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6210@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6211The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6212warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6213@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6214linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6215using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6216
726150b7
NC
6217@cindex PIC_VENEER
6218@kindex --pic-veneer
6219The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6220ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6221is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6222@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6223
6224@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6225@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6226The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6227code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6228perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6229placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6230controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6231The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6232duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6233group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6234code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6235where they should be placed.
6236
6237The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6238@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6239placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6240branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6241placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6242value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6243exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6244A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6245linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6246from the input sections.
6247
6248The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6249@samp{N = +1}.
6250
1a51c1a4
NC
6251Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6252only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6253otherwise.
6254
36f63dca
NC
6255@ifclear GENERIC
6256@lowersections
6257@end ifclear
6258@end ifset
6259
6260@ifset HPPA
6261@ifclear GENERIC
6262@raisesections
6263@end ifclear
6264
6265@node HPPA ELF32
6266@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6267@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6268@kindex --multi-subspace
6269When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6270import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6271The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6272stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6273multiple sub-spaces.
6274
6275@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6276@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6277Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6278stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6279@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6280sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6281a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6282the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6283conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6284prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6285A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6286branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6287@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6288@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6289detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6290positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6291
6292Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6293single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6294create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6295large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6296
6297@ifclear GENERIC
6298@lowersections
6299@end ifclear
6300@end ifset
6301
7fb9f789
NC
6302@ifset M68K
6303@ifclear GENERIC
6304@raisesections
6305@end ifclear
6306
6307@node M68K
6308@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6309
6310@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6311@kindex --got=@var{type}
6312The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6313The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6314@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6315the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6316@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6317entries only at non-negative offsets.
6318@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6319entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6320support such GOTs.
6321@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6322output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6323file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6324files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6325
6326@ifclear GENERIC
6327@lowersections
6328@end ifclear
6329@end ifset
6330
36f63dca
NC
6331@ifset MMIX
6332@ifclear GENERIC
6333@raisesections
6334@end ifclear
6335
6336@node MMIX
6337@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6338For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6339@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6340understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6341can translate between the two formats.
6342
6343There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6344Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6345registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6346equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6347@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6348global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6349this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6350symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6351
7a2de473
HPN
6352Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6353@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6354The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6355of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6356
6357Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6358are left out from an mmo file.
6359
6360@ifclear GENERIC
6361@lowersections
6362@end ifclear
6363@end ifset
6364
6365@ifset MSP430
6366@ifclear GENERIC
6367@raisesections
6368@end ifclear
6369
6370@node MSP430
6371@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6372For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6373will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6374just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6375
6376@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6377The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6378
6379@table @code
6380@item @samp{.vectors}
6381Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6382
6383@item @samp{.bootloader}
6384Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6385in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6386
6387@item @samp{.infomem}
6388Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6389this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6390
c0065db7 6391@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6392This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6393in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6394
6395@item @samp{.noinit}
6396Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6397
c0065db7 6398The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6399@end table
6400
6401@ifclear GENERIC
6402@lowersections
6403@end ifclear
6404@end ifset
6405
2a60a7a8
AM
6406@ifset POWERPC
6407@ifclear GENERIC
6408@raisesections
6409@end ifclear
6410
6411@node PowerPC ELF32
6412@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6413@cindex PowerPC long branches
6414@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6415Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6416displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6417@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6418@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6419the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6420section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6421section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6422@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6423both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6424considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6425
6426@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6427@table @option
6428@cindex PowerPC PLT
6429@kindex --bss-plt
6430@item --bss-plt
6431Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6432generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6433the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6434writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6435@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6436PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6437compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6438BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6439
016687f8
AM
6440@kindex --secure-plt
6441@item --secure-plt
6442@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6443@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6444when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6445layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6446style BSS PLT.
6447
2a60a7a8
AM
6448@cindex PowerPC GOT
6449@kindex --sdata-got
6450@item --sdata-got
6451The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6452sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6453@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6454section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6455@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6456@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6457@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6458@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6459PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6460pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6461GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6462really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6463
6464@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6465@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6466@item --emit-stub-syms
6467This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6468symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6469
6470@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6471@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6472@item --no-tls-optimize
6473PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6474sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6475disable the optimization.
6476@end table
6477
6478@ifclear GENERIC
6479@lowersections
6480@end ifclear
6481@end ifset
6482
6483@ifset POWERPC64
6484@ifclear GENERIC
6485@raisesections
6486@end ifclear
6487
6488@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6489@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6490
6491@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6492@table @option
6493@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6494@kindex --stub-group-size
6495@item --stub-group-size
6496Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6497by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6498@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6499sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6500a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6501the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6502conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6503prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6504A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6505branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6506@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6507@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6508detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6509positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6510
6511Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6512single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6513create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6514large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6515
6516@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6517@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6518@item --emit-stub-syms
6519This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6520symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6521
6522@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6523@kindex --dotsyms
6524@kindex --no-dotsyms
6525@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6526These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6527in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6528function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6529code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6530properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6531to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6532@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6533dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6534feature.
6535
6536@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6537@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6538@item --no-tls-optimize
6539PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6540sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6541disable the optimization.
6542
6543@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6544@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6545@item --no-opd-optimize
6546PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6547corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6548the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6549Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6550
6551@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6552@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6553@item --non-overlapping-opd
6554Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6555@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6556the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6557entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6558
6559@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6560@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6561@item --no-toc-optimize
6562PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6563entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6564reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6565marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6566marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6567relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6568unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6569reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6570discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6571reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6572code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6573optimization.
6574
6575@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6576@kindex --no-multi-toc
6577@item --no-multi-toc
6578By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6579entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6580total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6581grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6582TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6583calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6584help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
658564K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6586Use this option to turn off this feature.
6587@end table
6588
6589@ifclear GENERIC
6590@lowersections
6591@end ifclear
6592@end ifset
6593
49fa1e15
AM
6594@ifset SPU
6595@ifclear GENERIC
6596@raisesections
6597@end ifclear
6598
6599@node SPU ELF
6600@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6601
6602@cindex SPU ELF options
6603@table @option
6604
6605@cindex SPU plugins
6606@kindex --plugin
6607@item --plugin
6608This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6609
6610@cindex SPU overlays
6611@kindex --no-overlays
6612@item --no-overlays
6613Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6614regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6615@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6616turns off all this special overlay handling.
6617
6618@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6619@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6620@item --emit-stub-syms
6621This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6622symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6623
6624@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6625@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6626@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6627This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6628function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6629on calls to non-overlay regions.
6630
6631@cindex SPU local store size
6632@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6633@item --local-store=lo:hi
6634@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6635the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6636range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6637
c0065db7 6638@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6639@kindex --stack-analysis
6640@item --stack-analysis
6641SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6642unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6643under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6644@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6645@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6646determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6647for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6648for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6649for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6650find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6651and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6652under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6653dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6654is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6655and calls will be given.
6656
c0065db7 6657@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6658@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6659@item --emit-stack-syms
6660This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6661in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6662These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6663functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6664functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6665such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6666The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6667@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6668@end table
6669
6670@ifclear GENERIC
6671@lowersections
6672@end ifclear
6673@end ifset
6674
36f63dca
NC
6675@ifset TICOFF
6676@ifclear GENERIC
6677@raisesections
6678@end ifclear
6679
6680@node TI COFF
6681@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6682@cindex TI COFF versions
6683@kindex --format=@var{version}
6684The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6685TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6686also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6687format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6688header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6689
6690@ifclear GENERIC
6691@lowersections
6692@end ifclear
6693@end ifset
6694
2ca22b03
NC
6695@ifset WIN32
6696@ifclear GENERIC
6697@raisesections
6698@end ifclear
6699
6700@node WIN32
6701@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6702
c0065db7 6703This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6704See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6705command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6706
6707@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6708@cindex import libraries
6709@item import libraries
69da35b5 6710The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6711libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6712regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6713archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6714support for creating such libraries provided with the
6715@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6716
c0065db7
RM
6717@item exporting DLL symbols
6718@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6719The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6720
6721@table @emph
6722@item using auto-export functionality
6723@cindex using auto-export functionality
6724By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6725which is controlled by the following command line options:
6726
0a5d968e
NC
6727@itemize
6728@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6729@item --exclude-symbols
6730@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6731@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6732@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6733@end itemize
6734
09e2aba4
DK
6735When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6736(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6737symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6738often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6739private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6740options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6741exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6742final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6743
6744If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6745command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6746if either of the following are true:
6747
6748@itemize
6749@item A DEF file is used.
6750@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6751@end itemize
dc8465bf 6752
c0065db7
RM
6753@item using a DEF file
6754@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6755Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6756an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6757exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6758name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6759command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6760
6761@example
6762gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6763@end example
6764
0a5d968e
NC
6765Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6766@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6767
dc8465bf
NC
6768Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6769
6770@example
4b5bd4e7 6771LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6772
6773EXPORTS
6774foo
6775bar
6776_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6777another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6778var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
6779doo = foo == foo2
6780eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 6781@end example
dc8465bf 6782
7fcab871 6783This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
6784symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6785alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6786by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6787@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
6788@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
6789export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
6790in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
6791symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 6792
6b31ad16
DS
6793The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6794name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6795the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6796
b45619c0
NC
6797When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6798library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6799@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6800executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6801
6802With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6803specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6804non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6805
6806If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6807or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6808filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6809
4b5bd4e7
DS
6810The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6811
6812@example
6813EXPORTS
6814 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6815 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 6816 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 6817@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6818
6819Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6820@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6821@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6822@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6823Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
6824@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
6825string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
6826
6827The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6828
6829@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6830will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6831by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6832linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6833library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6834
6835@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6836The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6837the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6838@code{*_imp__foo}).
6839
6840@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6841well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6842read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6843variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6844the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6845extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6846application will behave unexpectedly.
6847
6848@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6849it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6850symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6851API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6852the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6853
4b5bd4e7
DS
6854See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6855other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6856
6857@cindex creating a DEF file
6858While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6859with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6860
6861@item Using decorations
6862@cindex Using decorations
6863Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6864itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6865declared as:
6866
6867@example
6868__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6869__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6870@end example
6871
6872All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6873any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6874this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6875the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6876
6877Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6878decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6879instead:
6880
6881@example
6882__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6883__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6884@end example
6885
c0065db7
RM
6886This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6887when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6888variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6889code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6890of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6891omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6892@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6893information.
c0065db7 6894@end table
dc8465bf 6895
2ca22b03
NC
6896@cindex automatic data imports
6897@item automatic data imports
6898The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6899by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6900compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6901issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6902code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6903c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6904initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6905decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6906platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6907command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6908The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6909suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6910trigger the feature's use.
6911
c0065db7 6912auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6913additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6914
c0065db7 6915"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6916documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6917
c0065db7
RM
6918The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6919occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6920One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6921below.
6922
6923@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6924For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6925object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6926offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6927field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6928in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6929without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6930The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6931references.
6932
c0065db7
RM
6933The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6934be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6935themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6936runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6937compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6938support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6939run without error on an older system.
6940
c0065db7
RM
6941@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6942enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6943
6944@cindex direct linking to a dll
6945@item direct linking to a dll
6946The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6947including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6948libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6949traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6950libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6951function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6952though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6953storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6954tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6955large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6956
c0065db7 6957Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6958@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6959of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
6960perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6961select the dll instead of an import library.
6962
2ca22b03 6963
69da35b5
NC
6964For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6965to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
6966
6967@example
45e948fe
NC
6968libxxx.dll.a
6969xxx.dll.a
6970libxxx.a
6971xxx.lib
69da35b5 6972cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
6973libxxx.dll
6974xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
6975@end example
6976
69da35b5
NC
6977before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6978
c0065db7
RM
6979(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6980where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6981@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6982file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
6983@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6984
c0065db7
RM
6985Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6986@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
6987was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6988various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6989could coexist on the same machine.
6990
2ca22b03
NC
6991The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6992applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 6993libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
6994
6995@example
6996bin/
6997 cygxxx.dll
6998lib/
6999 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7000 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7001@end example
7002
c0065db7
RM
7003Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7004done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7005
70061. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7007@example
7008gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7009@end example
2ca22b03 7010
69da35b5
NC
7011However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7012(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7013@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7014not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7015
2ca22b03
NC
70162. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7017directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7018should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7019making the app/dll.
7020
7021@example
7022ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7023@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7024
7025Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7026
7027@example
7028gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7029@end example
69da35b5
NC
7030
7031This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7032perfectly legal
7033
7034@example
7035bin/
7036 cygxxx-5.dll
7037lib/
c0065db7 7038 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7039@end example
7040
dc8465bf 7041Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7042even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7043@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7044
7045Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7046wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7047
70481. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7049work with auto-imported data.
7050
dc8465bf
NC
70512. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7052import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7053symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7054for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7055possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7056
45e948fe
NC
70573. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7058critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7059in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7060stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7061
69da35b5 7062So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7063true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7064a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7065binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7066massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7067requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7068will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7069
c0065db7 7070@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7071@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7072@item adding additional names
7073Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7074A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7075exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7076when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7077import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7078
c0065db7 7079@example
dc8465bf
NC
7080LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7081
7082EXPORTS
c0065db7 7083foo
dc8465bf 7084_foo = foo
c0065db7 7085@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7086
7087The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7088
7089Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7090source code using the "weak" attribute:
7091
c0065db7
RM
7092@example
7093void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7094void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7095@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7096
7097See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7098symbols.
7099
7100@item renaming symbols
7101Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7102kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7103@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7104DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7105created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7106
c0065db7 7107@example
dc8465bf
NC
7108LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7109
7110EXPORTS
7111_foo = foo
c0065db7 7112@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7113
7114The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7115@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7116@end table
dc8465bf 7117
0a5d968e 7118Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7119unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7120If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7121@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7122that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7123@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7124renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7125to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7126the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7127In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7128which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7129
7130@cindex weak externals
7131@item weak externals
7132The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7133weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7134defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7135are three variants of weak externals:
7136@itemize
7137@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7138called lazy externals.
7139@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7140This form is not presently implemented.
7141@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7142implemented.
7143@end itemize
7144As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7145are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7146uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7147
7148@cindex aligned common symbols
7149@item aligned common symbols
7150As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7151desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7152the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7153carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7154by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7155tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7156but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7157warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7158@end table
7159
7160@ifclear GENERIC
7161@lowersections
7162@end ifclear
7163@end ifset
7164
e0001a05
NC
7165@ifset XTENSA
7166@ifclear GENERIC
7167@raisesections
7168@end ifclear
7169
7170@node Xtensa
7171@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7172
7173@cindex Xtensa processors
7174The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7175@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7176specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7177keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7178example, with the command:
7179
7180@smallexample
7181SECTIONS
7182@{
7183 .text : @{
7184 *(.literal .text)
7185 @}
7186@}
7187@end smallexample
7188
7189@noindent
7190@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7191and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7192literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7193interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7194group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7195files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7196and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7197
43cd72b9 7198@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7199@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7200Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7201provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7202is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7203literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7204will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7205location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7206the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7207unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7208@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7209range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7210
7211For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7212to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7213instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7214instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7215instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7216@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7217hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7218By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7219switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7220density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7221instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7222performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7223linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7224a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7225
7226The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7227control the linker:
7228
7229@cindex Xtensa options
7230@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7231@item --size-opt
7232When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7233more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7234no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7235alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7236preserve the correctness of the code.
7237@end table
e0001a05
NC
7238
7239@ifclear GENERIC
7240@lowersections
7241@end ifclear
7242@end ifset
7243
252b5132
RH
7244@ifclear SingleFormat
7245@node BFD
7246@chapter BFD
7247
7248@cindex back end
7249@cindex object file management
7250@cindex object formats available
7251@kindex objdump -i
7252The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7253These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7254object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7255format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7256it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7257associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7258object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7259(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7260list all the formats available for your configuration.
7261
7262@cindex BFD requirements
7263@cindex requirements for BFD
7264As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7265several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7266BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7267formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7268been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7269BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7270may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7271
7272One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7273mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7274useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7275conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7276
7277@menu
7278* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7279@end menu
7280
7281@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7282@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7283@cindex opening object files
7284@include bfdsumm.texi
7285@end ifclear
7286
7287@node Reporting Bugs
7288@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7289@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7290@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7291
ff5dcc92 7292Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7293
7294Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7295it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7296to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7297work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7298@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7299
7300In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7301information that enables us to fix the bug.
7302
7303@menu
7304* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7305* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7306@end menu
7307
7308@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7309@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7310@cindex bug criteria
7311
7312If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7313
7314@itemize @bullet
7315@cindex fatal signal
7316@cindex linker crash
7317@cindex crash of linker
7318@item
7319If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7320@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7321
7322@cindex error on valid input
7323@item
ff5dcc92 7324If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7325
7326@cindex invalid input
7327@item
ff5dcc92 7328If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7329may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7330object files are correct.
7331
7332@item
7333If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7334improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7335@end itemize
7336
7337@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7338@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7339@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7340@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7341
7342A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7343products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7344recommend you contact that organization first.
7345
7346You can find contact information for many support companies and
7347individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7348distribution.
7349
ad22bfe8 7350@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7351Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7352@value{BUGURL}.
7353@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7354
7355The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7356@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7357fact or leave it out, state it!
7358
7359Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7360problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7361assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7362matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7363the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7364location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7365were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7366into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7367specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7368and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7369
7370Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7371the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7372on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7373
7374Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7375bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7376respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7377You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7378
7379To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7380
7381@itemize @bullet
7382@item
ff5dcc92 7383The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7384the @samp{--version} argument.
7385
7386Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7387the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7388
7389@item
ff5dcc92 7390Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7391patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7392
7393@item
7394The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7395version number.
7396
7397@item
ff5dcc92 7398What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7399``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7400
7401@item
7402The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7403observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7404list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7405sufficient.
7406
7407If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7408and then we might not encounter the bug.
7409
7410@item
7411A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7412bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7413provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7414bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7415state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7416requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7417we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7418attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7419
7420If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7421@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7422object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7423@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7424how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7425
7426@item
7427A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7428incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7429
ff5dcc92 7430Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7431will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7432not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7433a chance to make a mistake.
7434
7435Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7436say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7437copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7438C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7439and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7440fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7441you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7442any conclusion from our observations.
7443
7444@item
ff5dcc92 7445If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7446diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7447@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7448If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7449context, not by line number.
7450
7451The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7452sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7453@end itemize
7454
7455Here are some things that are not necessary:
7456
7457@itemize @bullet
7458@item
7459A description of the envelope of the bug.
7460
7461Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7462which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7463changes will not affect it.
7464
7465This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7466will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7467with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7468We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7469
7470Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7471of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7472output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7473less time, and so on.
7474
7475However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7476report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7477
7478@item
7479A patch for the bug.
7480
7481A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7482the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7483a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7484to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7485
ff5dcc92 7486Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7487construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7488through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7489able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7490fixed.
7491
7492And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7493patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7494help us to understand.
7495
7496@item
7497A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7498
7499Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7500things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7501@end itemize
7502
7503@node MRI
7504@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7505@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7506To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7507linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7508alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7509described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7510simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7511@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7512linker commands; these commands are described here.
7513
7514In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7515file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7516features to make use of them.
7517
7518You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7519@samp{-c} command-line option.
7520
7521Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7522command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7523blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7524MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7525issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7526
7527Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7528
7529You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7530lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7531The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7532
7533@table @code
7534@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7535@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7536@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7537Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7538the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7539@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7540your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7541script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7542commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7543input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7544@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7545
7546@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7547@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7548Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7549in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7550
7551@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7552
7553@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7554@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7555Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7556@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7557
7558@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7559@item BASE @var{expression}
7560Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7561absolute addresses) in the output file.
7562
7563@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7564@item CHIP @var{expression}
7565@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7566This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7567
7568@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7569@item END
7570This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7571
7572@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7573@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7574Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7575language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7576
7577@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7578@item
252b5132
RH
7579S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7580
7581@item
7582IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7583
7584@item
7585COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7586@samp{COFF}
7587@end enumerate
7588
7589@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7590@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7591Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7592@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7593
7594The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7595same line, with no change in its effect.
7596
7597@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7598@item LOAD @var{filename}
7599@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7600Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7601same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7602command line.
7603
7604@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7605@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7606@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7607MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7608option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7609
7610@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7611@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7612@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7613Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7614order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7615script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7616sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7617file, in the order specified.
7618
7619@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7620@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7621@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7622@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7623Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7624@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7625
7626@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7627@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7628@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7629@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7630You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7631specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7632If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7633@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7634@end table
7635
793c5807
NC
7636@node GNU Free Documentation License
7637@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7638@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7639
370b66a1
CD
7640@node LD Index
7641@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7642
7643@printindex cp
7644
7645@tex
7646% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7647% meantime:
7648\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7649\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7650\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7651\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7652\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7653\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7654\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7655\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7656\page\colophon
7657% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7658@end tex
7659
252b5132 7660@bye